Home

& 'COSTA SC33-1369-13 Owner's Manual

1. Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS ALTER QALIAS Use ALTER QALIAS to alter the parameters of an alias queue Synonym ALT OA ALTER QALIAS CMDSCOPE 1 056015 0 6 1 gt gt ALTER QALIAS 9 gt L Force 2 I QSGDISP COPY L CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 2 I Q0SGDISP GROUP L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP PRIVATE common q attrs H alias q attrs H Common q attrs _DEFPRTY integer DEFPSIST NO DESCR string PUT T ENABLED L ves Alias q attrs gt 3 3 3 CLUSTER clustername LCLUSNL nlname DEFBIND OPEN GET ENABLED 4 L tarcg string DISABLED SCOPE QMGR CELL Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 39 ALTER Queues 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp UNIX systems and Windows NT 40 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference ALTER Queues ALTER QLOCAL Use ALTER QLOCAL to alter the parameters of a local queue Synonym ALT OL ALTER QLOCAL
2. 1 r QSGDISP PSID integer 1 XCFGNAME 2 I QSGDISP COPY 2 QSGDISP GROUP Notes XCFGNAME gname XCFMNAME gt lt L XCFMNAME mname 1 This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it 2 only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions The parameter descriptions also apply to the ALTER command with the follwing exceptions The LIKE parameter applies only to the DEFINE command The NOREPLACE and REPLACE parameter applies only to the DEFINE command The variations in the CMDSCOPE and QSGDISP parameters between the ALTER and DEFINE commands are described storage class Name of the storage class This is required This is 1 through 8 characters The first character is in the range A through Z subsequent characters are A through Z or 0 through 9 132 MQSC Command Reference DEFINE STGCLASS Note Exceptionally certain all numeric storage class names are allowed but are reserved for the use of IBM service personnel The storage class must not be the same as any other storage class currently defined on this queue manager CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE
3. CMDSCOPE 1 rASGDISP QMGR 1 gt gt ALTER QLOCAL q name gt porce 2 L QSGDISP COPY I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 2 I QSGDISP GROUP CMDSCOPE QSGDISP PRIVATE 4 2 L QSGDISP SHARED lt common q attrs local q attrs Common q attrs perPRTY integer Loerpsist NO DESCR string J PUT ENABLED ves prsABLED Local q attrs J J L_BOQNAME string L BOTHRESH integer 1 3 CFSTRUCT CLUSTER clustername 3 3 DEFSOPT EXCL CLUSNL n Lname DEFBIND 0PEN T L SHARED P 4 GET ENABLED 1 DISTL e DISABLED INDXTYPE CORRELID YES MSGID MSGTOKEN NONE L wrta string wAXDEPTH integer L MAXMSGL integer MSGDLVSQ PRIORITY EMT E TRIGGER process string HARDENBO SHARE TRIGGER integer L QDEPTHLO integer QDPHIEV ENABLED L pIsABLED Chapter 2 The commands 41 ALTER Queues QDPLOEV ENABLED Looewxev ENABLED QSVCIEV NONE prsaBLED pus Lox
4. MQSC Command Reference Receiver channel ALTER CHANNEL ALTER CHANNEL 1 gt gt ALTER CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE RCVR gt 2 AUTOSTART DISABLED ENABLED r CMDSCOPE 6 gt gt garchsz integer 10 DESCR string I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 10 CMDSCOPE gt gt 3 wAXMSGL integer NCAUSER string HBINT integer 4 4 4 MRDATA string MREXIT string MRRTY integer 4 2 5 MSGDATA s tring gt 7 3 L NPMSPEED FAST T 5 L NORMAL MSGEXIT string r QSGDISP QMGR 6 gt gt PUTAUT DEF J QSGDISP COPY CTX 10 6 Q0SGDISP GROUP ONLYMCA QSGDISP PRIVATE 6 L ALTMCA gt 5 5 RCVDATA s tring RCVEXIT s tring Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 15 ALTER CHANNEL scvparA string scveXtT string 1 5 _SENDDATA s tring si SEQWRAP nteger J 5 L SENDEXIT Y string 7 TRPTYPE DECNET Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on O5 390 2 Valid only on Tandem NSK when TRPTYPE is LU62 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 39
5. QSGDISP GROUP gt gt lt define attrs common q attrs H local q attrs F model q attr H Define attrs NOREPLACE La REPLACE Common q attrs 3 3 3 3 p DEFPSIST NO DESCR 7 S DEFPRTY integer DEFPSIST YES L DESCR string L PUT DISABLED Local q attrs 3 3 1 3 p BOTHRESH 0 CFSTRUCT DEFSOPT EXCL BOQNAME string L BOTHRESH integer 1 L DEFSOPT SHARED CFSTRUCT name 110 MOSC Command Reference DEFINE QMODEL 3 4 3 3 1 DISTL NO GET ENABLED INDXTYPE NONE gt 4 L GET DISABLED 1 DISTL YES INDXTYPE MSGID CORRELID MSGTOKEN 3 5 3 rINITQC 7 r MAXDEPTH 5000 MAXMSGL 4 194 304 INITQ string MAXDEPTH integer MAXMSGL integer 3 3 3 3 r MSGDLVSQ PRIORITY r NOHARDENBO NOSHARE r NOTRIGGER D l Z j _ MSGDLVSQ FIFO HARDENBO SHARE TRIGGER 3 3 3 3 PROCESS QDEPTHHI 80 QDEPTHLO 40 gt L PROCESS string QDEPTHHI integer
6. but your installation might have changed it 8 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 9 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 10 Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 11 Not valid on OS 390 12 You can specify more than one value only on AIX HP UX 05 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 13 Valid only on OS 390 14 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 67 DEFINE CHANNEL Client connection channel DEFINE CHANNEL DEFINE CHANNEL channel name CHLT 1 YPE CLNTCONN CONNAME string 3 4 r CMDSCOPE 7 2 TRPTYPE DECNET LU62 10 5 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name NETBIOS 10 5 L_CMDSCOPE SPX TCP 6 6 7 LT DESCR r HBINT 300 _ pescR string 7 Cobdnned 2 HBINT integer 6 6 8 MAXMSGL 4 194 304 r NOREPLACE waxMsGL integer 8 REPLACE MODENAME string 6 8 6 PASSWORD QSGDISP QMGR 2 gt MUERE es 8 strin
7. for OS 390 144 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference DELETE Queues DELETE QMODEL Use DELETE QMODEL to delete a model queue definition Synonym DELETE OM DELETE QMODEL TCMDSCOPE 7 _ _ 1 DELETE QMODEL q name gt 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 L CMDSCOPE r QSGDISP QMGR 1 gt lt L QSGDISP COPY 2 QSGDISP GROUP Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 DELETE QREMOTE Use DELETE OREMOTE to delete a local definition of a remote queue It does not affect the definition of that queue on the remote system Synonym DELETE OR DELETE QREMOTE 05 0 22 1 DELETE QREMOTE 9 gt 2 t CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP QMGR 1 gt lt I QSGDISP COPY 2 QSGDISP GROUP Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 145 DELETE Queues Parameter descriptions q name The name of the queue must be defined to the local queue manager for all of the queue types For an alias queue this is the local name of the alias queue to be deleted For a model
8. RCVDATA RCVEXIT SCYDATA SCYEXIT SENDDATA SENDEXIT SEQWRAP SHORTRTY SHORTTMR TPNAME TRPTYPE DISPLAY CHANNEL The name of the namelist that specifies the list of clusters to which the channel belongs Connection name Whether sender should convert application message data Description Disconnection interval Heartbeat interval Long retry count Long retry timer Maximum message length for channel Message channel agent name Whether message channel agent runs as a separate process or a separate thread Message channel agent user identifier LU 6 2 mode name Channel message retry exit user data Channel message retry exit name Channel message retry exit retry count Channel message retry exit retry time Channel message exit user data Channel message exit names The priority for the network connection Nonpersistent message speed Password for initiating LU 6 2 session if nonblank this is displayed as asterisks Put authority Queue manager name Channel receive exit user data Channel receive exit names Channel security exit user data Channel security exit names Channel send exit user data Channel send exit names Sequence number wrap value Short retry count Short retry timer LU 6 2 transaction program name Transport type Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 155 DISPLAY CHANNEL USERID User identifier for initiating LU 6 2 session XMITO Transmission queue name
9. 6 L GET DISABLED 3 L DISTL YES INDXTYPE MSGID CORRELID L MSGTOKEN 108 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DEFINE QLOCAL 1 7 1 rINITQC 7 r MAXDEPTH 5000 MAXMSGL 4 194 304 INITQ string MAXDEPTH integer L MAXMSGL integer 1 1 8 1 r MSGDLVSQ PRIORITY NOHARDENBO SHARE NOTRIGGER LMSGDLVSQ FIFO HARDENBO NOSHARE TRIGGER 1 r PROCESS PROCESS string 1 1 1 QDEPTHHI 80 QDEPTHLO 40 QDPHIEV DISABLED L QDEPTHHI integer QDEPTHLO integer QDPHIEV ENABLED 1 1 1 SBPLOEV RISABLED 3 QDPMAXEV ENABLED p opPLoEV ENABLED L QDPMAXEV DISABLED QSVCIEV HIGH 0K 1 1 1 9 r QSVCINT 999 999 999 RETINTVL 999 999 999 SCOPE QMGR L QSVCINT integer L RETINTVL integer 9 L SCOPE CELL 1 3 1 1 L STGCLASS DEFAULT TRIGDATA 3 L TRIGDATA string LTRIGDPTH integer L STGCLASS string 1 1 1 r TRIGMPRI 0 ee USAGE NORMAL L TRIGMPRI integer TRIGTYPE EVERY USAGE XMITQ NONE Notes 1 This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it 2 Valid only on AIX
10. L CONVERT YES 10 L DESCR string I CMDSCOPE gmgr name 10 CMDSCOPE 3 3 DISCINT 6000 HBINT 300 gt DISCINT integer HBINT integer Lp 3 3 3 LONGRTY 999 999 999 LONGTMR 1200 MAXMSGL 4 194 304 L LONGRTY integer L LONGTMR integer L MAXMSGL integer 3 3 r MCATYPE THREAD r MCAUSER L MCATYPE PROCESS L MCAUSER string 3 4 3 4 3 4 MRDATA MREXIT MRRTY 10 i 4 4 4 MRDATA string LMREXIT string L MRRTY integer 3 4 3 3 r MRTMR 1000 MSGDATA MSGEXIT 4 MRTMR integer L 5 5 MSGDATA string MSGEXIT string 3 3 6 3 r NETPRTY 0 MODENAME NOREPLACE NPMSPEED FAST gt L NETPRTY integer 6 REPLACE NPMSPEED NORMAL L MODENAME string DEFINE CHANNEL 3 3 PUTAUT DEF QSGDISP QMGR 7 pRCVDATAC I PUTAUT CTX 10 QSGDISP COPY L L PUTAUT ONLYMCA 10 5 L QSGDISP GROUP RCVDATA string L PUTAUT ALTMCA 3 3 3 RCVEXIT SCYDATA SCYEXIT 7 SCYDATA string L SCYEXIT string 5 RCVEXIT string j 3 3 SENDDATA SENDEXIT 7 LJ 5 5 SENDDATA string SENDEXIT string
11. 1 L CMDSCOPE I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 gt 54 Notes 1 I QSGDISP COPY t QSGDISP GROUP QSGDISP PRIVATE 1 Parameter descriptions For a description of the parameters see 48 MOSC Command Reference DEFINE STGCLASS on page 132 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group ALTER TRACE ALTER TRACE Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use ALTER TRACE to change the trace events IFCIDs being traced for a particular active trace ALTER TRACE stops the specified trace and restarts it with the altered parameters Note ALTER TRACE does not affect any RMID 231 settings although a subsequent DISPLAY TRACE command will show them altered Synonym ALT TRACE ALTER TRACE r CMDSCOPE EM gt gt ALTER TRACE GLOBAL TNO integer STAT 1 ACCTG CMDSCOPE qmgr name gt gt lt L trace attrs H Trace attrs CLASS COMMENT string IFCID integer ifcid Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions The trace type you specify determines which IFCIDs are acti
12. Lintto string Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group d The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value 258 MQSC Command Reference START CHINIT qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled EN VPARM jcl substitution The parameters and values to be substituted in the JCL procedure xxxxCHIN where xxxx is the queue manager name that is used to start the channel initiator address space jcl substitution One or more character strings of the form keyword value enclosed in single quotation marks If you use more than one character string separate the strings by commas and enclose the entire list in single quotation marks for example ENVPARM HLO CSQ VER 520 This parameter is valid only on OS 390 INITO string The name of the initiation queue for the channel initiation process This is the initiation queue that is specified in the definition of the transmission queue This must not be specified on OS 390 the initiation q
13. MQSC Command Reference The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group DISPLAY NAMELIST DISPLAY NAMELIST Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DISPLAY NAMELIST to display the names a namelist Note On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris Synonym DIS NL DISPLAY NAMELIST DISPLAY NAMELIST generic namelist name r QSGDISP LIVE 1 r CMDSCOPE 7 1 Lau 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 CMDSCOPE gt lt I QSGDISP ALL L QSGDISP QMGR L QSGDISP COPY t QSGDISP GROUP Requested attrs QSGDISP PRIVATE requested attrs H Y__ALTDATE ALTTIME DESCR NAMCOUNT NAMES Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager
14. QDEPTHLO integer QDPHIEV ENABLED 3 3 3 QDPLOEV DISABLED QDPMAXEV ENABLED QSVCIEV NONE P L QDPLOEV ENABLED L QDPMAXEV DISABLED QSVCIEV HIGH Br 3 3 3 1 r QSVCINT 999 999 999 RETINTVL 999 999 999 STGCLASS DEFAULT P QSVCINT integer RETINTVL integer 1 STGCLASS string 3 3 3 3 TRIGDATA TRIGDPTH 1 TRIGMPRI 0 TRIGTYPE FIRST L TRIGDATA string TRIGDPTH integer integer TRIGTYPE EVERY DEPTH NONE 3 r USAGE NORMAL USAGE XMITQ Model q attr 3 DEFTYPE TEMPDYN I DEFTYPE PERMDYN 1 _DEFTYPE SHAREDYN Notes 1 Used only OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 111 DEFINE QMODEL 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 3 This is the default supplied with MOSeries but your installation might have changed it 4 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 5 This is the default supplied with except on OS 390 where it is 999 999 999 but your installation might have changed it 112 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DEFINE Use DEFINE to define new local definition of remote queue queue manager alias or a reply to queue alias and to s
15. Upon receipt of a response to a security message flow Any security message flows received from the remote processor on the remote queue manager are given to the exit At initialization and termination of the channel The format and maximum length of the name is the same as for MSGEXIT Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 89 DEFINE CHANNEL SENDDATA string Channel send exit user data maximum length 32 characters This is passed to the channel send exit when it is called On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can specify data for more than one exit program by specifying multiple strings separated by commas The total length of the field must not exceed 999 characters On OS 400 you can specify up to 10 strings each of length 32 characters The first string of data is passed to the first send exit specified the second string to the second exit and so on On other platforms you can specify only one string of send exit data for each channel SENDEXIT string Channel send exit name On platforms other than Tandem NSK if this name is nonblank the exit is called at the following times Immediately before data is sent out on the network The exit is given the complete transmission buffer before it is transmitted The contents of the buffer can be modified as required At initialization and termination of the channel On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can specify t
16. osverr integer nETINTVL integer 5 1 SCOPE QMGR STGCLASS string CELL reigpaTA string rRIGDPTH integer 1 1 integer TRIGTYPE FIRST j4 EVERY DEPTH NONE USAGE NORMAL Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 5 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp UNIX systems and Windows NT 42 MOSC Command Reference ALTER QMODEL Use ALTER OMODEL to alter the parameters of a model queue Synonym ALT OM ALTER QMODEL ALTER Queues gt lt CMDSCOPE 7 1 056015 0 0 1 ALTER QMODEL g name 2 I QSGDISP COPY I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 2 I Q0SGDISP GROUP L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP PRIVATE common q attrs H local 4 attrs model q attr H Common q attrs perPRTY integer Loerpsist P J DESCR string PUT ENABLED YES L_DISABLED
17. and for distributed queuing without CICS it must be CSQX START APPLTYPE string The type of application to be started Valid application types are integer system defined application type in the range 0 through 65 535 or a user defined application type in the range 65 536 through 999 999 999 For certain values in the system range a parameter from the following list can be specified in place of a numeric value CICS Represents a CICS transaction DOS Represents a DOS application IMS Represents an IMS transaction MVS Represents an OS 390 application batch or TSO NOTESAGENT Represents a Lotus Notes agent 100 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DEFINE PROCESS NSK Represents a Tandem NSK application OS2 Represents an OS 2 Warp application OS400 Represents an OS 400 application UNIX Represents a UNIX application VMS Represents a Digital OpenVMS application WINDOWS Represents a Windows application WINDOWSNT Represents a Windows NT application DEF This causes the default application type for the platform at which the command is interpreted to be stored in the process definition This default cannot be changed by the installation If the platform supports clients this is interpreted as the default application type of the server Only application types other than user defined types that are supported on the platform at which the command is executed should be used On Digital OpenVMS VMS is su
18. LU62 6 8 9 L USERID string NETBIOS 9 SPX TCP 10 UDP Notes 1 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 2 Valid only on OS 390 3 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 4 This is the default supplied with MOSeries but your installation might have changed it 5 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 6 X Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 7 can specify one value only OS 390 8 Not valid on OS 390 9 X Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT 10 Valid only on AIX 11 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 73 DEFINE CHANNEL Cluster receiver channel DEFINE CHANNEL 1 gt gt DEFINE CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE CLUSRCVR 2 2 CONNAME string gt 3 3 BATCHINT 0 CLUSTER CLUSNL 74 MQSC Command Reference BATCHINT integer BATCHSZ integer CLUSTER clustername L CLUSNL 3 3 r CONVERT NO CMDSCOPE 7 DESCR
19. PRIVATE Stop as a private channel on Stop as a private channel on Stop as a private channel on the local queue manager the named queue manager all active queue managers SHARED For RCVR SVRCONN Not permitted Not permitted SVR with a blank CONNAME stop as shared channel on all active queue managers For SDR ROSTR and SVR with a nonblank CONNAME stop as a shared channel on the queue manager where it is running If the channel is in an inactive state not running or if it is in RETRY state because the channel initiator on which it was running has stopped a STOP request for the channel is issued on the local queue manager This might automatically generate a command using CMDSCOPE and send it to the appropriate queue manager If there is no definition for the channel on the queue manager to which the command is sent or if the definition is unsuitable for the command the command will fail The definition of a channel on the queue manager where the command is entered might be used to determine the target queue manager where the command is actually run Therefore it is important that channel definitions are consistent Inconsistent channel definitions might result in unexpected command behavior MODE Specifies whether the current batch is allowed to finish in a controlled manner This parameter is optional QUIESCE Allows the current batch to finish processing except on OS 390
20. supported on the following platforms Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS DELETE QALIAS Use DELETE QALIAS to delete an alias queue definition Synonym DELETE DELETE QALIAS CMDSCOPE 7 1 DELETE QALIAS q name r QSGDISP QMGR CMDSCOPE 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 2 gt lt L QSGDISP COPY QSGDISP GROUP Notes 2 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 143 DELETE Queues DELETE QLOCAL Use DELETE OLOCAL to delete a local queue definition You can specify that the queue must not be deleted if it contains messages or that it can be deleted even if it contains messages Synonym DELETE OL DELETE QLOCAL NOPURGE CMDSCOPE 7 3 1 DELETE QLOCAL q name gt L PURGE 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 CMDSCOPE QSGDISP QMGR 1 gt lt L QSGDISP COPY 2 QSGDISP GROUP 2 _QSGDISP SHARED Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on
21. 1 4 4 4 r LONGRTY 999 999 999 LONGTMR 1200 MAXMSGL 4 194 304 L LONGRTY integer _ integer L MAXMSGL integer 4 5 r MCATYPE THREAD L MCANAME J 5 MCATYPE PROCESS 4 4 6 4 puer MSGDATA MCAUSER string 6 7 MODENAME string y 7 MSGDATA string 4 4 rMSGEXIT 7 NOREPLACE NPMSPEED FAST L REPLACE NPMSPEED NORMAL 7 L MSGEXIT string 4 6 8 4 r PASSWORD QSGDISP QMGR 2 6 8 11 L PASSWORD string QSGDISP COPY 11 7 QSGDISP GROUP RCVDATA Z string 72 MQSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL 4 4 4 pROVEXITC 7 SCYDATA SCYEXIT 7 SCYDATA string SCYEXIT string 7 RCVEXIT string 4 4 SENDDATA SENDEXIT 7 7 SENDDATA string SENDEXIT string 4 4 4 SEQNRAP 999 999 999 SHORTRTY 10 SHORTTMR 60 L SEQURAP integer L SHORTRTY integer I SHORTTMR integer 4 6 7 6 LTPNAME string 4 6 8 p USERID 7 TRPTYPE
22. SENDDATA CI string 55 sEQURAP integer SHORTRTY integer 6 SENDEXIT string SHORTTMR integer J 5 L TRPTYPE LU62 j TPNAME string 8 NETBIOS 8 SPX TCP 9 UDP gt lt 5 7 _USERID string Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 2 Valid only on OS 390 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 5 only if TRPTYPE is LU62 6 You can specify only one value on OS 390 7 Not valid on OS 390 8 Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT 9 X Valid only on AIX 10 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 25 ALTER CHANNEL Cluster receiver channel ALTER CHANNEL 1 2 gt gt ALTER CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE CLUSRCVR 1 BATCHINT integer gt gaTCHSZ integer L cuusTER clustername 1 cLUsNL n1name FCMDSCOPE 6 gt 9 cONNAME string l I CMDSCOPE qmgr name YES 9
23. gTCHSZ integer 11 L coNNAME string I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 11 L CMDSCOPE gt L CONVERT NO Loescr string DISCINT integer 3 LONGRTY integer LoNeTMR integer HBINT integer gt gt waxMsGL integer MCANAME string 4 MCATYPE PROCESS MCAUSER string MSGDATA string MODENAME string gt gt 3 L L NPMSPEED FAST T 6 L NORMAL MSGEXIT string r QSGDISP QMGR 2 gt gt 5 7 QSGDISP COPY PASSWORD string 11 I QSGDISP GROUP L QSGDISP PRIVATE gt gt 6 6 RCVDATA s tring RCVEXIT string Chapter 2 commands 11 ALTER CHANNEL scvparA string scveXtT string 1 6 _SENDDATA s tring sEQURAP integer SHORTRTY integer 6 SENDEXIT string L SHORTTHR integer 5 8 L TPNAME string TRPTYPE DECNET LU62 9 NETBIOS 9 SPX HTCP 10 UDP 5 7 Lxurro string USERID string Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 2 Valid only on OS 390 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 O
24. CMDSCOPE gt pescR string prsciNr integer BINT integer 1 integer gt LONGTMR integer MAXMSGL integer process THREAD gt ucauser string 3 MODENAME string gt 4 4 4 MRDATA string MREXIT string MRRTY integer gt 4 L 5 MSGDATA Y string gt T NETPRTY integer NPMSPEED FAST yl s NORMAL 5 MSGEXIT 2 string r QSGDISP QMGR 6 gt PUTAUT DEF QSGDISP COPY CTX 9 6 QSGDISP GROUP ONLYMCA QSGDISP PRIVATE 6 ALTMCA 26 MOQSeries MQSC Command Reference ALTER CHANNEL CJ CJ 5 5 RCVDATA s tring RCVEXIT s tring scypata string scvextT string 5 SENDDATA CI string 1 SEQWRAP integer sHortety integer 5 SENDEXIT string gt lt suoRTTMR integer 3 TRPTYPE LU62 L TPNAME string 7 105 7 SPX TCP 8 UDP Notes 1 1 Ud Q This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 Not valid on OS 390 You can specify one value only on OS 390 Valid on
25. STGCLASS string The name of the storage class This parameter is supported only on local and model queues This is an installation defined name This parameter is valid on OS 390 only For more information see the The first character of the name must be uppercase A Z and subsequent characters either uppercase A Z or numeric 0 9 Note You can change this parameter only if the queue is empty and closed On platforms other than OS 390 this parameter is ignored 128 Command Reference Define queues If you specify OSGDISP SHARED or DEFTYPE SHAREDYN this parameter is ignored TARGO string The local name of the base queue being aliased See FRules for naming The maximum length is 48 characters This parameter is supported only on alias queues This must be one of the following although this is not checked until the alias queue is opened by an application e A local queue not a model queue Acluster queue e local definition of a remote queue This queue need not be defined until an application process attempts to open the alias queue TRIGDATA string The data that is inserted in the trigger message The maximum length of the string is 64 bytes This parameter is supported only on local and model queues For a transmission queue on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris or Windows NT you can use this parameter to specify the name of the chann
26. Specifies the disposition of the object to which you are applying the command that is where it is defined and how it behaves COPY The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR is not affected by this command GROUP 142 MQsSeries MOSC Command Reference The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP GROUP Any object residing on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command except a local copy of the object is not affected by this command If the command is successful the following command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the queue sharing group to cause them to delete local copies on page set 0 DELETE PROCESS name QSGDISP COPY The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value DELETE Queues DELETE queues This section contains the following commands These queues
27. 1 REPOSNL STRSTPEV SYNCPT TRIGINT Notes 1 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 2 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 188 Command Reference DISPLAY QMGR 3 Valid only on OS 390 4 Not valid on OS 390 5 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions ALL Specify this to cause all parameters to be displayed If this parameter is specified any parameters that are requested specifically have no effect all parameters are still displayed On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT this is the default if you do not request any specific parameters CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if QSGDISP is set to GROUP or SHARED ox The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing g
28. 264 265 266 270 270 274 274 275 276 276 2277 277 279 279 281 281 284 284 287 289 291 303 303 303 304 304 304 305 305 305 305 307 313 Tables A How to read syntax diagrams CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for DISPLAY CHSTATUS CURRENT CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for DISPLAY CHSTATUS SHORT CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for DISPLAY CHSTATUS SAVED Parameters that can be returned by the DISPLAY QUEUE command CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for PING CHANNEL CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE dor RESET CHANNEL Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 167 167 167 206 230 238 10 11 12 13 14 CHLDISP CMDSCOPE for RESOLVE CHANNEL 247 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for START CHANNEL 2 0 256 Destinations allowed for sach type 267 Constraints allowed for each trace type 267 IFCID descriptions for IFCID trace events and casses D 42 4 42267 Resource Manager identifiers that are allowed 268 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for STOP CHANNEL o 2272 Vi MOsSeries MQSC Command Reference About this book This book describes the MQSeries commands MQSC which system operators and administrators can use to manage queue managers on the following MQSeries platforms Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp e OS 390 05 400 Tandem NSK UNIX operating systems Windows N
29. Bibliography 9305 MQSeries on the Internet 306 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference Index A ACTION parameter RESET CLUSTER 239 RESET TPIPE 244 RESOLVE CHANNEL 245 RESOLVE INDOUBT 248 active thread display 218 active trace display list of 220 ADD parameter MOVE QLOCAL 226 administrator commands 285 alias queue alter parameters 39 define 106 delete definition 143 display attributes 200 ALL parameter DISPLAY CHANNEL 152 DISPLAY CHSTATUS 162 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 169 DISPLAY NAMELIST 182 DISPLAY PROCESS 185 DISPLAY OMGR 189 DISPLAY OSTATUS 195 DISPLAY QUEUE 203 DISPLAY SECURITY 214 DISPLAY STGCLASS 217 ALTDATE parameter DISPLAY CHANNEL 154 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 DISPLAY NAMELIST 183 DISPLAY PROCESS 186 DISPLAY OMGR 189 DISPLAY QUEUE 208 DISPLAY STGCLASS 217 ALTER CHANNEL command 10 ALTER NAMELIST command 28 ALTER PROCESS command 29 ALTER OALIAS command 39 ALTER OLOCAL command 41 ALTER command 30 ALTER OMODEL command 43 ALTER OREMOTE command 45 ALTER SECURITY command 46 ALTER STGCLASS command 48 ALTER TRACE command 49 ALTTIME parameter DISPLAY CHANNEL 154 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 DISPLAY NAMELIST 183 DISPLAY PROCESS 186 DISPLAY OMGR 189 DISPLAY QUEUE 208 DISPLAY STGCLASS 217 APPLICID parameter DEFINE PROCESS 100 DISPLAY PROCESS 186 APPLTAG parameter DISPLAY QSTATUS 197 APPLTYPE parameter DEFINE PROCESS 100 DISPLAY PROCESS 186 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 APPLTYPE parameter continued DISPLAY
30. DEFINE PROCESS 3 3 USERDATA ENVRDATA L USERDATA string L ENVRDATA string Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 3 This is the default supplied with MOSeries but your installation might have changed it 4 The default depends on the platform and can be changed by your installation Parameter descriptions The parameter descriptions also apply to the ALTER PROCESS command with the following exceptions The LIKE parameter applies only to the DEFINE PROCESS command The NOREPLACE and REPLACE parameter applies only to the DEFINE PROCESS command The variations in the CMDSCOPE and QSGDISP parameters between the ALTER PROCESS and DEFINE PROCESS commands are described process name Name of the MOSeries process definition see age 4 This is required The name must not be the same as any other process definition currently defined on this queue manager unless REPLACE is specified APPLICID string The name of the application to be started This might typically be a fully qualified file name of an executable object The maximum length is 256 characters For a CICS application this is a CICS transaction ID and for an IMS application it is an IMS transaction ID On OS 390 for distributed queuing using CICS it must be
31. Destination block L DEST 1 GTF gt lt RES SMF SR Constraint block CLASS RMID TNO CLASS r USERID USERID integer RMID integer TNO integer Notes 1 string Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 220 MOQsSeries MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY TRACE Parameter descriptions All parameters are optional Each option that is used limits the effect of the command to active traces that were started using the same option either explicitly or by default with exactly the same parameter values Does not limit the list of traces This is the default The CLASS option cannot be used with DISPLAY TRACE Each of the remaining parameters in this section limits the list to traces of the corresponding type ACCTG Accounting data the synonym is A GLOBAL Service data from the entire MQSeries subsystem the synonym is C STAT Statistical data the synonym is 5 COMMENT string Specifies a comment This does not appear in the display but it might be recorded in trace output DETAIL output type Limits the information that a trace displays based on the output type specified Possible values for output type are 1 Display summary trace information TNO TYPE CLASS and DEST 2 Display qualification trace information TNO and RMID Re
32. Fora channel type of SVRCONN or CLNTCONN this is the time in seconds between heartbeat flows passed from the server MCA when that MCA has issued an MOGET with WAIT on behalf of a client application This allows the server to handle situations where the client connection fails during an MOGET with WAIT This type of heartbeat is valid only for AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT The value must be in the range zero through 999 999 A value of zero means that no heartbeat exchange takes place The value that is used is the larger of the values specified at the sending side and the receiving side LIKE channel name The name of a channel whose parameters will be used to model this definition This parameter applies only to the DEFINE CHANNEL command If this field is not filled in and you do not complete the parameter fields related to the command the values are taken from one of the following depending upon the channel type SYSTEM DEESENDER Sender channel SYSTEM DEESERVER Server channel SYSTEM DEF RECEIVER Receiver channel SYSTEM DEF REQUESTER Requester channel Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 81 DEFINE CHANNEL SYSTEM DEESVRCONN Server connection channel SYSTEM DEF CLNTCONN Client connection channel SYSTEM DEF CLUSSDR Cluster sender channel SYSTEM DEF CLUSRCVR Cluster receiver channel This is equivalent to defining the following object LIKE SYSTEM DEF SENDER for a sender channel and similarly
33. GROUP The object was defined with OSGDISP GROUP COPY The object was defined with QSGDISP COPY Requested parameters Specify one or more parameters that define the data to be displayed You can specify the parameters in any order but do not specify the same parameter more than once Some parameters are relevant only for channels of a particular type or types Attributes that are not relevant for a particular type of channel cause no output nor is an error raised ALTDATE The date on which the definition was last altered in the form yyyy mm dd ALTTIME The time at which the definition was last altered in the form hh mm ss AUTOSTART Whether an LU 6 2 responder process should be started for the channel BATCHINT Minimum batch duration BATCHSZ Batch size CHLTYPE Channel type On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT the channel type is always displayed if you specify a generic channel name and do not request any other parameters On OS 390 the channel type is always displayed On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT TYPE type can be used as a synonym for this parameter CLUSTER The name of the cluster to which the channel belongs 154 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference CLUSNL CONNAME CONVERT DESCR DISCINT HBINT LONGRTY LONGTMR MAXMSGL MCANAME MCATYPE MCAUSER MODENAME MRDATA MREXIT MRRTY MRTMR MSGDATA MSGEXIT NETPRTY NPMSPEED PASSWORD PUTAUT
34. This parameter applies to OS 390 only and can take the values of PRIVATE SHARED In conjunction with the various values of the CMDSCOPE parameter this parameter controls two types of channel SHARED A receiving channel is shared if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue sharing group A sending channel is shared if its transmission queue has a disposition of SHARED PRIVATE A receiving channel is private if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue manager A sending channel is private if its transmission queue has a disposition other than SHARED Note This disposition is not related to the disposition set by the disposition of the queue sharing group of the channel definition The combination of the CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE parameters also controls from which queue manager the channel is operated The possible options are On the local queue manager where the command is issued On another specific named queue manager in the group On every active queue manager in the group On the most suitable queue manager in the group determined automatically by the queue manager itself The various combinations of CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE are summarized in Chapter 2 The commands 271 STOP CHANNEL Table 14 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for STOP CHANNEL CHLDISP CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE local qmgr CMDSCOPE qmgr name CMDSCOPE
35. commands 17 ALTER CHANNEL r QSGDISP QMGR 8 gt L QSGDISP COPY 12 E QSGDISP GROUP 7 L QSGDISP PRIVATE RCVDATA s tring 7 SCYDATA string scveXtT string RCVEXIT Y string gt Ga 7 7 L SENDDATA string SENDEXIT Y string SEQWRAP integer 6 9 TPNAME string TRPTYPE DECNET LU62 10 NETBIOS 10 SPX TCP 11 UDP gt 5 6 USERID string Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except 05 390 2 Valid only on Tandem NSK when TRPTYPE is LU62 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 5 Not valid on OS 390 6 Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 7 You can specify more than one value on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only 8 Valid only on OS 390 9 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS 10 Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT 11 Valid only on AIX 18 MOSeries MQSC Command Reference gt lt ALTER CHANNEL 12 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 19 ALTER CHANNEL Client connection channel ALTER
36. string MSGEXIT string Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 61 DEFINE CHANNEL gt 8 9 8 11 13 NPMSPEED FAST PASSWORD QSGDISP QMGR 2 9 11 13 14 L NPMSPEED NORMAL L PASSWORD string QSGDISP COPY 14 L QSGDISP GROUP 8 8 8 RCVDATA RCVEXIT 7 SCYDATA CI SCYDATA string 12 12 RCVDATA string RCVEXIT string 8 8 8 rSCYEXIT 7 r SENDDATA SENDEXIT om 7 12 12 SENDDATA string SENDEXIT string 8 8 8 8 11 8 11 SEQWRAP 999 999 999 SHORTRTY 10 SHORTTMR 60 6 52222 E m 13 gt lt 7 i 11 TPNAME string USERID 11 USERID string 13 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on This is not mandatory on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT This is the default supplied with but your installation might have Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Notes 1 O5 390 2 Valid only on OS 390 3 Solaris and Windows NT 4 5 6 X Valid only on AIX 7 Valid only on Tandem NSK 8 changed it 9 Windows NT 10 NT 11 Vali
37. this is displayed as INITIALIZI RUNNING The channel is either transferring messages at this moment or is waiting for messages to arrive on the transmission queue so that they can be transferred STOPPING The channel is stopping or a close request has been received RETRYING A previous attempt to establish a connection has failed The MCA will reattempt connection after the specified time interval PAUSED The channel is waiting for the message retry interval to complete before retrying an MOPUT operation STOPPED This state can be caused by one of the following Channel manually stopped A user has entered a stop channel command against this channel Retry limit reached The MCA has reached the limit of retry attempts at establishing a connection No further attempt is made to establish a connection automatically Chapter 2 The commands 171 DISPLAY CLUSQMGR A channel in this state can be restarted only by issuing the START CHANNEL command or starting the MCA program in an operating system dependent manner REQUESTING SUSPEND A local requester channel is requesting services from a remote MCA Whether this queue manager is suspended from the cluster or not as a result of the SUSPEND OMGR command This is either YES or NO Channel parameters ALTDATE ALTTIME BATCHINT BATCHSZ CONNAME CONVERT DESCR DISCINT HBINT LONGRTY LONGTMR MAXMSGL MCANAME MCATYPE MCAUSER
38. 1414 gt 2 1 3 LUNAME string PORT port number 1 r TRPTYPE TCP INDISP QMGR 1 1 4 TRPTYPE LU62 INDISP GROUP 1 3 PADDR ip address Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only for TRPTYPE LU62 3 Valid only for TRPTYPE TCP 4 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled INDISP Specifies the disposition of the inbound transmissions that are to be handled The possible values are OMGR Listen for transmissions directed to the queue manager This is the default GROUP Listen for transmissions directed to the queue sharing group This is allowed only if there is a shared queue manager environment IPADDR IP address for TCP IP spe
39. 3 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS 4 Valid only for clients to be run on DOS OS 2 Warp Windows or Windows NT 5 Valid only on Tandem NSK 6 This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it 7 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 8 only on OS 390 9 You can specify more than one value only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 10 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The commands 71 DEFINE CHANNEL Cluster sender channel DEFINE CHANNEL 4 1 3 BATCHINT 0 DEFINE CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE CLUSSDR CONNAME string L BATCHINT integer 4 4 4 r BATCHSZ 50 CLUSTER CLUSNL BATCHSZ integer CLUSTER clustername CLUSNL 4 4 CMDSCOPE 2 CONVERT NO DESCR 11 CONVERT YES L DESCR string I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 11 LCMDSCOPE 4 4 DISCINT 6000 HBINT 300 DISCINT integer HBINT integer
40. 4 Co a REPLACE 10 10 L MSGDATA string L MSGEXIT 7 string 7 8 7 NEMSPEED EAS 11 050015 0 6 11 i 8 I PUTAUT CTX 12 NPMSPEED NORMAL 11 056015 L PUTAUT ONLYMCA 12 11 L QSGDISP GROUP L PUTAUT ALTMCA 64 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL 7 7 7 r SEQWRAP 999 999 999 RCVDATA RCVEXIT SCYDATA 7 7 SCYDATA string 10 10 RCVDATA string RCVEXIT X string 7 7 7 SCYEXIT SENDDATA SENDEXIT gt L SCYEXIT string 7 B 10 10 SENDDATA X string SENDEXIT string 7 gt lt L SEQURAP integer Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on 05 390 2 This is not mandatory on AIX HP UX 05 2 Warp 05 390 05 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 3 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS 4 Valid only on OS 2 Warp or Windows NT 5 X Valid only on AIX 6 X Valid only on Tandem NSK 7 This is the default supplied with MOSeries but your installation might have changed it 8 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 9 Not valid on OS 390 10 You can specify more than one value only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun
41. Any object with a different disposition is not changed This parameter applies only to the DEFINE NAMELIST command NOREPLACE The definition should not replace any existing definition of the same name REPLACE The definition should replace any existing definition of the same name If a definition does not exist one is created 98 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DEFINE PROCESS DEFINE PROCESS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DEFINE PROCESS to define new process definition set its parameters Synonym DEF PRO DEFINE PROCESS 7 1 DEFINE 0 55 55 5 5 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 L CMDSCOPE r QSGDISP QMGR gt 2 define attrs process attrs 056015 1 2 L QSGDISP GROUP Define attrs gt lt r NOREPLACE eu Process attrs 3 DESCR 7 3 APPLICID DESCR string APPLTYPE 4 CICS DEF DOS IMS MVS NOTESAGENT NSK 052 05400 UNIX VMS integer WINDOWS WINDOWSNT APPLICID string Chapter 2 The commands 99
42. Sun Solaris and Windows NT 2 Supported only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 3 Supported only on OS 390 4 Not supported on OS 390 or OS 400 The date on which the definition or information was last altered in the form yyyy mm dd ALTTIME The time at which the definition or information was last altered in the form hh mm ss BOONAME Backout requeue name BOTHRESH Backout threshold CLUSDATE The date on which the definition became available to the local queue manager in the form yyyy mm dd CLUSNL The namelist that defies the cluster that the queue is in CLUSOMGR The name of the queue manager that hosts the que CLUSOT Cluster queue type This can be OALIAS ue The cluster queue represents an alias queue OLOCAL The cluster queue represents a local queue 208 MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY QUEUE OMGR The cluster queue represents a queue manager alias OREMOTE The cluster queue represents a remote queue CLUSTER The name of the cluster that the queue is in CLUSTIME The time at which the definition became available to the local queue manager in the form hh mm ss CRDATE The date on which the queue was defined in the form yyyy mm dd CRTIME The time at which the queue was defined in the form hh mm ss CURDEPTH Current depth of queue On OS 390 CURDEPTH is returned as zero for queues defined with a disposition of GROUP
43. The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group CONNAME string Connection name For cluster receiver channels it relates to the local queue manager and for other channels it relates to the target queue manager The maximum length is 48 characters on OS 390 and 264 characters on other platforms The value you specify depends on the transport type TRPTYPE to be used DECnet The DECnet node name and the DECnet object name in the form CONNAME node_name object_name This is valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS LU 6 2 On Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS this is the SNA gateway node name access name and the tpname that is used by SNA to invoke the remote program The format of this information is as follows CONNAME gateway_node access_name tpname e On OS 390 there are two forms in which to specify the value Logical unit name The logical unit information for the queue manager comprising the logical unit name TP name and optional mode name This can be specified in one of 3 forms Form Example luname 16 12355 luname TPname IGY12345 APING luname TPname modename IGY12345 APINGD INTER 78 MQSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL For the first form the TP name and mode
44. generated OK Service Interval OK events are generated NONE No service interval events are generated QSVCINT integer The service interval used for comparison to generate Service Interval High and Service Interval OK events This parameter is supported only on local and model queues and has no effect if it is specified on a shared queue See the QSVCIEV parameter The value is in units of milliseconds and must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 REPLACE and NOREPLACE This option controls whether any existing definition and on MOSeries for OS 390 of the same disposition is to be replaced with this one Any object with a different disposition is not changed The default is NOREPLACE NOREPLACE The definition should not replace any existing definition of the object REPLACE If the object does exist the effect is similar to issuing the ALTER command without the FORCE option and with all the other parameters specified In particular note that any messages that are on the existing queue are retained The difference between the ALTER command without the FORCE option and the DEFINE command with the REPLACE option is that ALTER does not change unspecified parameters but DEFINE with REPLACE sets all the parameters When you use REPLACE unspecified parameters are taken either from the object named on the LIKE option or from the default definition and the parameters of the object being repla
45. means display all queues whose names begin with PAY When you need to use any of these special characters in a field for example as part of a description you must enclose the whole string in single quotation marks Building command scripts You may want to build the MQSeries commands into a script when you use The CSOINP1 CSOINP2 and CSOINPX initialization data sets or the CSQUTIL batch utility on OS 390 2 MQSC Command Reference Rules for using commands The STRMOMMOSC command on OS 400 The runmqsc command on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp Tandem NSK UNIX systems and Windows NT When you do this follow these rules Each command must start on a new line On each platform there might be platform specific rules about the line length and record format If scripts are to be readily portable to different platforms the significant length of each line should be restricted to 72 characters On OS 390 scripts are held in a fixed format data set with a record length of 80 Only columns 1 through 72 can contain meaningful information columns 73 through 80 are ignored On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT each line can be of any length up to the maximum allowed for your platform On other UNIX systems and Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS each line can be of any length up to and including 80 characters On Tandem NSK each line can be of any length up to and inc
46. where the channel stops after the current message has finished 272 MQsSeries MQSC Command Reference STOP CHANNEL processing The batch is then ended and no more messages are sent even if there are messages waiting on the transmission queue For a receiving channel if there is no batch in progress the channel waits for either The next batch to start The next heartbeat if heartbeats are being used before it stops For server connection channels allows the current connection to end This is the default Terminates transmission of any current batch This is likely to result in in doubt situations For server connection channels breaks the current connection returning MORC CONNECTION BROKEN Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 273 STOP STOP Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use STOP CHINIT to stop a channel initiator Notes 1 This is valid only for channels used for distributed us without CICS If ou are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual 2 The command server must be running Synonym STOP CHI STOP CHINIT STOP CHINIT gt lt r CMDSCOPE 4 1 SHARED STOP I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue
47. 1 gt lt destination block constraint block H comment string Destination block DEST RES SMF L SRV Constraint block CLASS IFCID CLASS integer IFCID ifcid RMID integer r USERID 7 CORRELATION USERID s tring Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 265 START TRACE Parameter descriptions If you do not specify a trace type to be started the default GLOBAL trace is started The types are ACCTG Collects accounting data that can be used to charge your customers for their use of your queue manager The synonym is A Note Accounting data can be lost if the accounting trace is started or stopped while applications are running For information about the conditions that must be satisfied for successful collection of accounting data see the GLOBAL This includes data from the entire queue manager The synonym is G STAT Collects statistical data broadcast by various components of at time intervals that can be chosen during installation The synonym is S CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands
48. 100 QDEPTHLO integer The threshold against which the queue depth is compared to generate a Queue Depth Low event This parameter is supported only on local and model queues For more information about the effect that shared queues on OS 390 have on this event see the book This event indicates that an application has retrieved a message from a queue and this has caused the number of messages on the queue to become less than or equal to the queue depth low threshold See the QDPLOEV parameter The value is expressed as a percentage of the maximum queue depth MAXDEPTH parameter and must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 100 QDPHIEV Controls whether Queue Depth High events are generated This parameter is supported only on local and model queues A Queue Depth High event indicates that an application has put a message on a queue and this has caused the number of messages on the queue to become greater than or equal to the queue depth high threshold see the QDEPTHHI parameter Note The value of this parameter can change implicitly For more information on this and the effect that shared queues on OS 390 have on this event see the description of the Queue Depth High event in theMQSeries Monitoring book ENABLED Queue Depth High events are generated DISABLED Queue Depth High events are not generated QDPLOEV Controls whether Queue Depth Low events are generated This parameter is sup
49. 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MODE parameter ARCHIVE 52 STOP CHANNEL 272 STOP OMGR 279 SUSPEND 285 model queue alter parameters 43 define 110 delete definition 145 display attributes 200 MODENAME parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 84 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MOVE parameter MOVE OLOCAL 226 MOVE QLOCAL command 225 commands 285 publications 303 MRDATA parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 84 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MREXIT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 84 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MRRTY parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 84 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MRTMR parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 85 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MSGDATA parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 85 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MSGDLVSQ parameter DEFINE queues 122 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 MSGEXIT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 85 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MSGS parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 166 N NAMCOUNT parameter DISPLAY NAMELIST 183 name spaces 4 namelist alter 28 define 95 delete 139 display contents 181 rules for names of 6 NAMES parameter DEFINE NAMELIST 97 DISPLAY NAMELIST 183 NETPRTY parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 86 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 NID parameter RESOLVE INDOUBT 249 NOHARDENBO parameter DEFINE queues 119 NOPURGE parameter DELETE OLOCAL 146 NOREPLACE option DEFINE CHANNEL 89 DEFINE NAMELIST 98 DEFINE PROCESS 103 DEFINE queue
50. 156 MOSeries MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY CHSTATUS DISPLAY CHSTATUS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp UNIX systems Compaq NSK Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DISPLAY CHSTATUS to display the status of one or more channels Note On OS 390 1 This is valid only for channels used for distributed queuing without CICS If you are using CICS for distributed queuing see the Tim ET manual 2 The command fails if the channel initiator has not been started 3 The command server must be running Synonym DIS CHS DISPLAY CHSTATUS CHLDISP ALL 3 DISPLAY CHSTATUS generic channel name 4 CHLDISP SHARED CHLDISP PRIVATE CURRENT 05 22 3 gt SAVED 4 3 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name SHORT 4 CMDSCOPE CONNAME mv e common status H current only status H Common status short status H gt lt Y__CURLUWID CURMSGS CURSEQNO INDOUBT LSTLUWID LSTSEQNO STATUS Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 157 DISPLAY CHSTATUS Current only status Y 5 BATCHSZ BUFSRCVD BUFSSENT BYTSRCVD t BYTSSENT CHSTADA CHSTATI 1 HBINT 2 JOBNAME LONGRTS LSTMSGDA LSTMSGTI 3 MAXMS
51. 213 213 215 215 218 218 220 3221 223 223 225 225 226 228 229 2 231 232 232 2239 233 234 234 236 237 239 239 241 241 242 243 243 245 245 247 248 248 250 250 RVERIFY SECURITY Parameter descriptions SET LOG Parameter descriptions Usage notes START CHANNEL Parameter descriptions START CHINIT MOQGeries for OS 390 MOSGSeries on other platforms Parameter descriptions START CMDSERV Usage notes START LISTENER Parameter descriptions START OMGR Parameter descriptions START TRACE Parameter descriptions STOP CHANNEL j Parameter descriptions STOP CHINIT Parameter descriptions Usage notes STOP CMDSERV Usage notes STOP LISTENER Parameter descriptions STOP OMGR Parameter descriptions STOP TRACE Parameter descriptions SUSPEND OMGR Parameter descriptions Appendix Notices Trademarks Glossary of terms and abbreviations Bibliography MOGeries cross platform pulbtigations MQeries platform specific publications Softcopy books HTML format Portable Document Format PDF BookManager format PostScript format Windows Help format MOSeries information available on fhe Internet Index Sending your comments to IBM 251 251 252 252 253 254 255 258 258 258 258 260 260 261 262 264
52. 285 286 MOSC Command Reference Appendix Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the United States IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this information in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this information The furnishing of this information does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A For license inquiries regarding double byte DBCS information contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries in writing to IBM World Trade Asia Corporation Licensing 2 31 Roppongi 3 chome Minato ku Tokyo 106 Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country whe
53. 3 3 3 SEQWRAP 999 999 999 SHORTRTY 10 SHORTTMR 60 L SEQURAP integer LSHORTRTY integer SHORTTMR integer 3 6 TPNAME 6 raprvPE LU62 LTPNAME string 8 NETBIOS 8 SPX TCP 9 Lupp Notes 1 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 2 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 3 This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it 4 Not valid on OS 390 5 You can specify one value only OS 390 6 Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 7 Valid only on OS 390 8 Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT 9 X Valid only on AIX 10 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 75 DEFINE CHANNEL Parameter descriptions The parameter descriptions also apply to the ALTER CHANNEL command with the following exceptions The LIKE parameter applies only to the DEFINE CHANNEL command The REPLACE and NOREPLACE parameter applies only to the DEFINE CHANNEL command The variations in the CMDSCOPE and QSGDISP parameters between the ALTER CHANNEL and DEFINE CHANNEL commands are described Parameters are optional unless the description states that they are required channel name The name of the new channel definition Thi
54. 32 190 define parameters 57 delete definition 136 display 150 ping 228 reset 236 resolve 245 start 254 start initiator 258 start listener 261 stop 270 channel initiator start 258 stop 274 CHANNEL parameter DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 170 DISPLAY QSTATUS 197 channel status displaying 157 channels rules for names of 6 CHLDISP parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 161 PING CHANNEL 229 RESET CHANNEL 237 RESOLVE CHANNEL 246 START CHANNEL 255 STOP CHANNEL 270 CHLTYPE parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 77 DISPLAY CHANNEL 154 CHSTADA parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 CHSTATI parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 CLASS parameter ALTER TRACE 50 DISPLAY TRACE 222 START TRACE 267 STOP TRACE 283 CLEAR OLOCAL command 54 CLUSDATE parameter DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 170 307 CLUSDATE parameter continued DISPLAY QUEUE 208 CLUSINFO parameter DISPLAY QUEUE 203 CLUSNL parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 77 DEFINE queues 115 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY QUEUE 204 208 RESUME OMGR 250 SUSPEND 284 CLUSOMGR parameter DISPLAY QUEUE 208 CLUSQT parameter DISPLAY QUEUE 208 cluster refresh 233 reset 239 CLUSTER parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 77 DEFINE queues 116 DISPLAY CHANNEL 154 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 170 DISPLAY QUEUE 203 209 RESUME OMGR 250 SUSPEND 284 cluster queue manager display 168 clusters rules for names of 6 CLUSTIME parameter DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 170 DISPLAY QUEUE 209 CLWLDATA parameter ALTER 33 DISPLAY 190 CLWLEXIT parameter ALTER
55. 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group If CHLDISP is set to SHARED CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager Ea The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled T The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Note The option is not permitted if CHLDISP is FIXSHARED CHLDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only and can take the values of PRIVATE SHARED FIXSHARED In conjunction with the various values of the CMDSCOPE parameter this parameter controls two types of channel SHARED A receiving channel is shared if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue sharing group A sending channel is shared if its transmission queue has a disposition of SHARED PRIVATE A receiving channel is private if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue manager A sending ch
56. 999 999 if the queue is on OS 390 640 000 if the queue is on any other MOSeries platform Other factors can still cause the queue to be treated as full for example if there is no further DASD space available If this value is reduced any messages that are already on the queue that cause the new maximum to be exceeded remain intact MAXMSGL nteger The maximum length in bytes of messages on this queue This parameter is supported only on local and model queues On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT specify a value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to the maximum message length for the queue manager See the MAXMSGL parameter of the ALTER OMGR command for more information On OS 390 specify a value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 100 MB However if you also specify OSGDISP SHARED or DEFTYPE SHAREDYN the MAXMSGL must be less than or equal to 64 512 bytes On other platforms specify a value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 4 194 304 bytes 4 MB For a transmission queue this value includes the space required for headers It is recommended that the value should be at least 4000 bytes Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 121 Define queues larger than the maximum expected length of user data in any message that could be put on a transmission queue If this value is reduced any messages that are already on the queue whose lengt
57. CHANNEL 1 gt gt ALTER CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE CLNTCONN gt r CMDSCOPE 2 gt 8 cONNAME string pescr string I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 8 L CMDSCOPE 3 waxMsGL integer 4 HBINT integer MODENAME string QSGDISP QMGR 2 4 L uname string I Q0SGDISP COPY L PASSWORD string 8 I Q0SGDISP GROUP LQSGDISP PRIVATE gt 5 5 RCVDATA string RCVEXIT 2 string scvDATA string L scveXrT string 1 5 L_SENDDATA s tring gt T 4 TPNAME string 5 L_SENDEXIT s tring gt lt 6 4 TRPTYPE DECNET USERID string LU62 7 NETBIOS 7 SPX 20 MQSC Command Reference ALTER CHANNEL Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 2 Valid only on OS 390 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 5 You can specify more than one value on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only 6 only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS 7 Valid only for clients to be run on DOS OS 2 Warp Windows and Windows NT 8 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a
58. DEFBIND Default message binding DEFPRTY Default priority of the messages put on the queue DEFPSIST Whether the default persistence of messages put on this queue is set to NO or YES NO means that messages are lost across a restart of the queue manager DEFSOPT Default share option on a queue opened for input DEFTYPE Queue definition type This can be PREDEFINED Predefined The queue was created with a DEFINE command either by an operator or by a suitably authorized application sending a command message to the service queue PERMDYN Permanent dynamic Either the queue was created by an application issuing MOOPEN with the name of a model queue specified in the object descriptor MOOD or if this is a model queue this determines the type of dynamic queue that can be created from it On OS 390 the queue was created with OSGDISP OMGR TEMPDYN Temporary dynamic Either the queue was created by an application issuing MOOPEN with the name of a model queue specified in the object descriptor MOOD or if this is a model queue this determines the type of dynamic queue that can be created from it On OS 390 the queue was created with OSGDISP OMGR SHAREDYN Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 209 DISPLAY QUEUE A permanent dynamic queue was created when an application issued an call with the name of this model queue specified in the object descriptor MOOD On OS 390 in a queue sharing group
59. ENABLED Lori 4 DISABLED L enagLED 6 6 6 CHADEXIT string L CLWLDATA string CLWLEXIT string 6 CHADEV DISABLED ENABLED 6 oenpo string oerxrmo string pescR string CLWLLEN Length gt gt 3 3 160 Peres IGQAUT DEF ENABLED CTX ONLYIGQ ALTIGQ 3 INHIBTEV ENABLED LOCALEV ENABLED IGQUSER useridr prsagLED DISABLED 30 MOQSeries 5 Command Reference ALTER QMGR MAXHANDS integer 4 MAXMSGL integer 1 PERFMEV MAXUMSGS integer DISABLE RtMoTECY enale 6 6 DISABLED REPOS clustername REPOSNL n name L STRSTPEV ENABLED TRIGINT integer DISABLED Notes 1 Not valid on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 3 only on OS 390 4 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 5 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris Tandem NSK and Windows NT 6 Valid only on AIX HP UX 05 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Parameter descriptions The parameters you specify override the current values Attri
60. Glossary for OS 390 examples of resources are buffer pools page sets log data sets queues and messages resource manager An application program or transaction that manages and controls access to shared resources such as memory buffers and data sets MOGeries CICS and IMS are resource managers Resource Recovery Services RRS An OS 390 facility that provides 2 phase syncpoint support across participating resource managers responder In distributed queuing a program that replies to network connection requests from another system resynch In an option to direct a channel to start up and resolve any in doubt status messages but without restarting message transfer return codes The collective name for completion codes and reason codes rollback Synonym for back out RRS Resource Recovery Services RTM Recovery termination manager rules table A control file containing one or more rules that the dead letter queue handler applies to messages on the DLQ 5 SAF System Authorization Facility SDWA System diagnostic work area security enabling interface SEI The MOSeries interface to which customer or vendor written programs that check authorization supply a user identifier or perform authentication must conform A part of the MOSeries Framework SEI Security enabling interface sender channel In message queuing a channel that initiates transfers removes messages from a trans
61. Local q attrs string integer 1 DEFSOPT Bae J n L CFSTRUCT name SHARED gt 3 Leeri emeren 1 DISTL DISABLED INDXTYPE CORRELID L YES MSGID MSGTOKEN L NONE inrta string waxpEPTH integer wxMset integer MSGDLVSQ PRIORITY NOHARDENBO NOSHARE NOTRIGGER PROCESS string HARDENBO SHARE TRIGGER gt integer Looeprito integer QDPHIEV ENABLED J L_DISABLED QDPLOEV ENABLED QDPMAXEV QSVCIEV NONE L DISABLED DISABLED HIGH L 0K Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 43 ALTER Queues gsvcrnt integer L aeri NL integer 1 RIGDATA string STGCLASS string rRtGDPTH integer rRtGWPRI integer TRIGTYPE FIRST J USAGE NORMAL J EVERY Lymo DEPTH NONE Model q attr DEFTYPE L TEMPDYN PERMDYN 1 L SHAREDYN Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 44 MOSC Command Reference ALTER Queues ALTER QREMOTE Use ALTER OREMOTE to alter the parameters of a local definition of a remote queue a queue man
62. MRDATA MREXIT MRRTY MRTMR MSGDATA MSGEXIT NETPRTY NPMSPEED PASSWORD PUTAUT 172 MQSC Command Reference MODENAME The date on which the definition or information was last altered in the form yyyy mm dd The time at which the definition or information was last altered in the form hh mm ss Minimum batch duration Batch size Connection name Whether the sender should convert application message data Description Disconnection interval Heartbeat interval Long retry count Long retry timer Maximum message length for channel Message channel agent name Whether the message channel agent runs as a separate process or a separate thread Message channel agent user identifier LU 6 2 mode name Channel message retry exit user data Channel message retry exit name Channel message retry exit retry count Channel message retry exit retry time Channel message exit user data Channel message exit names The priority for the network connection Nonpersistent message speed Password for initiating LU 6 2 session if nonblank this is displayed as asterisks Put authority RCVDATA RCVEXIT SCYDATA SCYEXIT SENDDATA SENDEXIT SEQWRAP SHORTRTY SHORTTMR TRPTYPE TPNAME USERID DISPLAY CLUSQMGR Channel receive exit user data Channel receive exit names Channel security exit user data Channel security exit name Channel send exit user data Channel send exit names Sequence number wrap value Short retry co
63. MSGEXIT 11 we L 5 12 12 MSGDATA string MSGEXIT string 7 7 10 11 NOREPLACE NPMSPEED FAST PASSWORD L REPLACE 8 0 1 L NPMSPEED NORMAL LPASSWORD string 66 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference 7 DEFINE CHANNEL 7 r PUTAUT DEF QSGDISP QMGR 13 gt I PUTAUT CTX 14 13 I QSGDISP COPY 5 I PUTAUT ONLYMCA 14 12 13 L QSGDISP GROUP RCVDATA string L PUTAUT ALTMCA 7 7 7 RCVEXIT 7 SCYDATA SCYEXIT 7 SCYDATA string E aS 12 LRCVEXIT string 7 L SENDDATA 7 SENDEXIT LJ 12 12 SENDDATA 6 string SENDEXIT string 7 7 10 7 10 11 r SEQWRAP 999 999 999 7 USERID lt L SEQWRAP integer 10 10 11 L TPNAME string L USERID string Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 2 This is not mandatory on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 3 Valid only on Compag DIGITAL OpenVMS 4 Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT 5 Valid only on AIX 6 Valid only on Tandem NSK 7 This is the default supplied with
64. OS 390 the user ID assigned to the channel initiator started task by the OS 390 started procedures table For TCP IP other than OS 390 the user ID from the inetd conf entry or the user that started the listener For SNA other than OS 390 the user ID from the SNA server entry or in the absence of this the incoming attach request or the user that started the listener For NetBIOS or SPX the user ID that started the listener The maximum length of string is 64 characters on Windows NT and 12 characters on other platforms On Windows NT you can optionally qualify a user identifier with the domain name in the format user domain This parameter is not valid for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of CLNTCONN MODENAME tring LU 6 2 mode name maximum length 8 characters This parameter is valid only for channels with a transport type TRPTYPE of LU 6 2 If TRPTYPE is not LU 6 2 the data is ignored and no error message is issued If specified this should be set to the SNA mode name unless the CONNAME contains a side object name in which case it should be set to blanks The actual name is then taken from the CPI C Communications Side Object or APPC side information data set See the information about configuration parameters for an LU 6 2 connection for your platform in the MQSeries Intercommunication manual for more information This parameter is not valid for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of RC
65. Original Program Model This is no longer supported on MOSeries It is replaced by the Integrated Language Environment ILE OTMA Open Transaction Manager Access outbound channel A channel that takes messages from a transmission queue and sends them to another queue manager See also shared outbound channel output log buffer In MOSeries for OS 390 a buffer that holds recovery log records before they are written to the archive log output parameter A parameter of an MOI call in which the queue manager returns information when the call completes or fails P page set A VSAM data set used when MOSeries for 5 390 moves data for example queues and messages from buffers in main storage to permanent backing storage DASD Programmable command format PCF command See programmable command format pending event An unscheduled event that occurs as a result of a connect request from a CICS adapter percolation In error recovery the passing along a preestablished path of control from a recovery routine to a higher level recovery routine performance event A category of event indicating that a limit condition has occurred performance trace An MOSeries trace option where the trace data is to be used for performance analysis and tuning permanent dynamic queue dynamic queue that is deleted when it is closed only if deletion is explicitly requested Permanent dynamic queues are recovered if the queue man
66. PROCESS generic process name r CMDSCOPE 7 2 QSGDISP LIVE 2 t CMDSCOPE qmgr name 3 CMDSCOPE 3 t QSGDISP ALL QSGDISP QMGR L QSGDISP COPY t QSGDISP GROUP 3 _QSGDISP PRIVATE gt lt Requested attrs E requested attrs 1 Y__ALTDATE 1 ALTT IME APPLICID APPLTYPE DESCR ENVRDATA USERDATA Notes 1 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 2 Valid only on OS 390 3 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 184 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY PROCESS Parameter descriptions You must specify the name of the process you want to display This can be a specific process name or a generic process name By using a generic process name you can display either All process definitions One or more processes that match the specified name generic process name ALL The name of the process definition to be displayed see Rules far naming age 4 A trailing asterisk matches all processes with the specified stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk on its own specifies all processes The names must all be defined to the local queue manager Specify this to display al
67. PROCESS 102 DEFINE queues 120 DEFINE STGCLASS 133 list of queue names alter 28 define 95 delete 139 display 181 listener start 261 stop 277 local queue alter parameters 41 clear 54 define 108 delete definition 144 display attributes 200 move 225 LOCALEV parameter ALTER OMGR 36 DISPLAY OMGR 191 log archive 51 display 178 set 252 LONGRTS parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 166 LONGRTY parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 82 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 LONGTMR parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 82 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 LSTLUWID parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 164 LSTMSGDA parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 166 LSTMSGTI parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 166 LSTSEQNO parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 164 MAXDEPTH parameter DEFINE QLOCAL 121 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 MAXHANDS parameter ALTER 36 DISPLAY 191 maximum number of messages define 93 MAXMSGL parameter ALTER OMGR 36 DEFINE CHANNEL 83 DEFINE OLOCAL 121 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CHSTATUS 166 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 DISPLAY OMGR 191 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 Index 309 parameter DISPLAY 191 MAXRTU parameter SET LOG 252 maxsmsgs define 93 display 180 MAXUMSGS parameter ALTER OMGR 37 MCANAME parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 83 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MCASTAT parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 166 parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 83 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 MCAUSER parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 83 DISPLAY CHANNEL
68. SHARED 2 L CHLDISP FIXSHARED Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 254 MOSC Command Reference START CHANNEL Parameter descriptions channel name The name of the channel definition to be started This is required The name must be that of an existing channel defined on this queue manager CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group If CHLDISP is set to SHARED CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager command is executed the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled E The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group This option is not permitted if CHLDISP is FIXSHARED CHLDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only and can take the values of PRIVA
69. Solaris and Windows NT 3 Valid only on OS 390 4 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 5 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp UNIX systems and Windows NT Parameter descriptions The parameter descriptions also apply to the ALTER QUEUE commands with the following exceptions The FORCE parameter applies only to the ALTER QUEUE commands The LIKE parameter applies only to the DEFINE QUEUE commands The REPLACE and NOREPLACE parameter applies only to the DEFINE QUEUE commands The variations in the CMDSCOPE and QSGDISP parameters between the ALTER QUEUE and DEFINE QUEUE commands are described q name Local name of the queue except for the remote queue where it is the local definition of the remote queue This is required The name must not be the same as any other queue name of whatever queue type currently defined on this queue manager unless REPLACE or ALTER is specified See l BOQNAME string The excessive backout requeue name This parameter is supported only on local and model queues Apart from maintaining a value for this parameter the queue manager takes no action based on its value BOTHRES H integer The backout threshold This parameter is supported only on local and model queues 114 MQSC Command Reference Define queues Apart from main
70. Solaris and Windows NT 11 Valid only on OS 390 12 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The commands 65 DEFINE CHANNEL Requester channel DEFINE CHANNEL 1 DEFINE CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE RQSTR CONNAME s t ring gt 6 7 2 3 AUTOSTART DISABLED BATCHSZ 50 LU62 6 L BATCHSZ integer 4 L AUTOSTART ENABLED NETBIOS 4 SPX TCP 5 UDP 7 7 8 CMDSCOPE 13 DESCR HBINT 300 14 ES 8 I CMDSCOPE gmgr name HBINT integer 14 L CMDSCOPE 7 r MAXMSGL 4 194 304 L MAXMSGL integer LMCANAME 3J 7 9 7 7 10 r MCATYPE PROCESS r MCAUSER MODENAME 9 LMCAUSER string 10 MCATYPE THREAD MODENAME string 7 11 7 11 7 11 2 MRRTY 10 11 11 11 MRDATA string MREXIT st ring MRRTY integer 7 11 7 7 MRTMR 1000 4 MSGDATA
71. The MOSeries interface to which customer or vendor written programs that transmit messages between an MOSeries 296 MOSC Command Reference queue manager and another messaging system must conform A part of the MOSeries Framework message descriptor Control information describing the message format and presentation that is carried as part of an MOSeries message The format of the message descriptor is defined by the MOMD structure message priority In an attribute of a message that can affect the order in which messages on a queue are retrieved and whether a trigger event is generated message queue Synonym for queue message queue interface MOI The programming interface provided by the MOSeries queue managers This programming interface allows application programs to access message queuing services message queuing programming technique in which each program within an application communicates with the other programs by putting messages on queues message sequence numbering A programming technique in which messages are given unique numbers during transmission over a communication link This enables the receiving process to check whether all messages are received to place them in a queue in the original order and to discard duplicate messages messaging See synchronous messaging and asynchronous messaging model queue object A set of queue attributes that act as a template when
72. a program creates a dynamic queue MOAI MOSeries Administration Interface MOI Message queue interface MOI channel Connects an MOSeries client to a queue manager on a server system and transfers only MOI calls and responses in a bidirectional manner Contrast with message channel MOSC commands MOSeries family of IBM licensed programs that provides message queuing services MOSeries Administration Interface MOAD programming interface to MOSeries MOSeries client Part of an MOSeries product that can be installed on a system without installing the full queue manager The client accepts MOI calls from applications and communicates with a queue manager on a server system MOSeries commands MOSC Human readable commands uniform across all platforms that are used to manipulate MOSeries objects namelist An object that contains a list of names for example queue names name service In MQSeries on UNIX systems for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT the facility that determines which queue manager owns a specified queue name service interface NSI The MQSeries interface to which customer or vendor written programs that resolve queue name ownership must conform A part of the Framework name transformation In MQSeries on UNIX systems MOSeries for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT an internal process
73. but your installation might have changed it Chapter 2 The commands 95 DEFINE NAMELIST Parameter descriptions The parameter descriptions also apply to the ALTER NAMELIST command with the following exceptions The LIKE parameter applies only to the DEFINE NAMELIST command The REPLACE and NOREPLACE parameter applies only to the DEFINE NAMELIST command The variations in the CMDSCOPE and QSGDISP parameters between the ALTER NAMELIST and DEFINE NAMELIST commands are described name Name of the list This is required The name must not be the same as any other namelist name currently defined o on this queue manager unless REPLACE or ALTER is specified CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if OSGDISP is set to GROUP JA The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which it was entered only if you are using a shared queue environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue ma
74. by the DISPLAY QUEUE command continued CFSTRUCT Local queue Model queue Alias queue Remote queue Cluster queue CLUSDATE CLUSNL CLUSOMGR CLUSQT CLUSTER X CLUSTIME CRDATE CRTIME CURDEPTH DEFBIND DEFPRTY DEFPSIST DEFSOPT DEFTYPE DESCR DISTL GET HARDENBO INDXTYPE INITO 5 MAXDEPTH MAXMSGL MSGDLVSO OPPROCS PROCESS PUT ODEPTHHI ODEPTHLO ODPHIEV ODPLOEV ODPMAXEV QSGDISP QSVCIEV QSVCINT OTYPE RETINTVL Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 207 DISPLAY QUEUE Table 5 Parameters that can be returned by the DISPLAY QUEUE command continued ALTDATE Local queue Model queue Alias queue Remote Cluster queue queue RNAME ROMNAME SCOPE SHARE vw STGCLASS3 al TARGQ TRIGDATA TRIGDPTH TRIGGER TRIGMPRI USAGE XMITO Notes 1 Supported only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400
75. characters The first character is in the range A through Z subsequent characters are A through Z or 0 through 9 Usage notes 1 The resultant values of XCFGNAME and XCFMNAME must either both be blank or both be nonblank Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 135 DELETE CHANNEL DELETE CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DELETE CHANNEL to delete a channel definition Notes for OS 390 users 1 This is valid only for channels used for distributed um without CICS If ou are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual 2 The command fails if the channel initiator and command server have not been started or the channel status is RUNNING except for client connection channels which can be deleted without the channel initiator or command server running 3 You can only delete cluster sender channels that have been created manually Synonym DELETE CHL DELETE CHANNEL r CHLTABLE QMGRTBL DELETE CHANNEL channel name gt L CHLTABLE CLNTTBL r CMDSCOPE 7 1 QSGDISP QMGR 1 gt gt lt 2 L QSGDISP COPY I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 2 L QSGDISP GROUP CMDSCOPE Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing grou
76. command server enters the STOPPED state If this command is issued while the command server is in a DISABLED or STOPPED state no action is taken the command server remains in its current state and an error message is returned to the command originator 276 MQSC Command Reference STOP LISTENER STOP LISTENER Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use STOP LISTENER to stop a channel listener Notes 1 This is valid only for channels used for distributed peu without CICS If ou are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual The command server and the channel initiator must be running If a listener is listening on multiple addresses or ports only the address and port combinations with the address or port specified are stopped If a listener is listening on all addresses for a particular port a stop request for a specific IPADDR with the same port fails If neither an address nor a port is specified all addresses and ports are stopped and the listener task ends Synonym STOP LSTR STOP LISTENER TRPTYPE TCP CMDSCOPE 7 STOP LISTENER gt r INDISP QMGR L TRPTYPE LU62 1 CMDSCOPE qmgr name gt lt INDISP GROUP 1 IPADDR ip address PORT um Notes 1 Valid only
77. defined but it must be available for a trigger event to occur If the queue is a transmission queue the process gives the name of the channel to be started This parameter is optional for transmission queues on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT if you do not specify it the channel name is taken from the value specified for the TRIGDATA parameter PUT Whether messages can be put on the queue ENABLED Messages can be added to the queue by suitably authorized applications This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it DISABLED Messages cannot be added to the queue 122 MQSC Command Reference Define queues This parameter can also be changed using the MOSET API call QDEPTHH integer The threshold against which the queue depth is compared to generate a Queue Depth High event This parameter is supported only on local and model queues For more information about the effect that shared queues OS 390 have on this event see the MQSeries Event Monitoring book This event indicates that an application has put a message on a queue and this has caused the number of messages on the queue to become greater than or equal to the queue depth high threshold See the QDPHIEV parameter The value is expressed as a percentage of the maximum queue depth MAXDEPTH parameter and must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to
78. derived from MCAUSER or both ONLYMCA The default user ID is used Any user ID received from the network is not used This value is supported only on OS 390 ALTMCA The user ID from the UserIdentifier field of the message descriptor is used Any user ID received from the network is not used This value is supported only on OS 390 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of RCVR ROSTR CLUSRCVR or SVRCONN CTX and ALTMCA are not valid for SVRCONN channels QMNAME string Queue manager name For channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of CLNTCONN this is the name of the queue manager to which an application running in the MOI client environment can request connection For channels of other types this parameter is not valid OSGDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only Specifies the disposition of the object to which you are applying the command that is where it is defined and how it behaves Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 87 DEFINE CHANNEL QSGDISP ALTER DEFINE COPY The object definition resides the page set The object is defined on the page set of the of the queue manager that executes the queue manager that executes the command command object was defined using a using the OSGDISP GROUD object of the command that had the parameters same name as the LIKE object QSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository any object def
79. descriptor of a message on the SYSTEM OSG TRANSMIT QUEUE ONLYIGO Indicates that only the IGQ user ID should be used to establish authority to put messages to a destination queue For all ID checks this involves using the IGQ user ID Indicates that the IGO user ID and the ALT user ID should be used to establish authority to put messages to a destination queue For one user ID check this involves using the IGQ user ID For two user ID checks this involves using the IGQ user ID and the ALT user ID Chapter 2 The commands 35 ALTER QMGR IGOUSER Nominates a user ID referred to as the IGQ user ID to be used by the agent IGOA to establish authority to put messages to a destination queue This parameter applies only to OS 390 Possible values are Blanks This is the default value for the IGO user ID and indicates that the user ID of the receiving queue manager within the QSG should be used Specific user ID Indicates that the user ID specified in the receiving queue manager s IGOUSER parameter should be used Notes 1 As the receiving queue manager has authority to all queues it can access this means that security checking may not be performed for this user ID type 2 As the default value of blanks has a special meaning you cannot use IGQUSER to specify a real user ID of blanks INHIBTEV Whether inhibit Inhibit Get and Inhibit Put events are generated ENABLED Inhibi
80. displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY If there is a shared queue manager 204 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference GROUP PRIVATE SHARED DISPLAY QUEUE environment and the command is being executed on the queue manager where it was issued also display information for objects defined with OSGDISP SHARED Display information for objects defined with OSGDISP OMGR or QSGDISP COPY If there is a shared queue manager environment and the command is being executed on the queue manager where it was issued this option also displays information for objects defined with OSGDISP GROUP or QSGDISP SHARED In a shared queue manager environment use DISPLAY QUEUE name CMDSCOPE QSGDISP ALL to list ALL objects matching name in the queue sharing group without duplicating those in the shared repository Display information only for objects defined with OSGDISP COPY Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP GROUP This is allowed only if there is a shared queue manager environment Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY Display information only for objects defined with QOSGDISP OMGR Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP SHARED This is allowed only in a shared queue manager environment Note For cluster queues this is always treated as a requested paramet
81. disposition is not related to the disposition set by the disposition of the queue sharing group of the channel definition The combination of the CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE parameters also controls from which queue manager the channel is operated The possible options are On the local queue manager where the command is issued On another specific named queue manager in the group The various combinations of CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE are summarized in Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 237 RESET CHANNEL Table 7 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for RESET CHANNEL CHLDISP CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE local qmgr CMDSCOPE qmgr name PRIVATE Reset private channel on the Reset private channel on the local queue manager named queue manager SHARED Reset a shared channel on all Not permitted active queue managers This might automatically generate a command using CMDSCOPE and send it to the appropriate queue managers If there is no definition for the channel on the queue managers to which the command is sent or if the definition is unsuitable for the command the action fails there The definition of a channel on the queue manager where the command is entered might be used to determine the target queue manager where the command is actually run Therefore it is important that channel definitions are consistent Inconsistent channel definitions might result in unexpected command behavior SEQNUM integer The n
82. dispositions of INDISP QMGR or INDISP GROUP d If IPADDR is not specified the listener listens on all available addresses e For TCP IP it is possible to listen on multiple addresses and port combinations For each START LISTENER for TCP IP request the address and port combination is added to the list of combinations upon which the listener is currently listening A START LISTENER for TCP IP request fails if it specifies the same or a subset or superset of an existing combination of addresses and ports upon which a TCP IP listener is currently listening If you are starting a listener on a specific address to provide a secure interface with a security product for example a firewall it is important to ensure there is no linkage to the other non secure interfaces in the system You should disable IP forwarding and routing from other non secure interfaces so that packets arriving at the other interface do not get passed to this specific address Consult the appropriate TCP IP documentation for information on how to do this On OS 400 OS 2 Warp UNIX systems and Windows NT this command is valid only for channels for which the transmission protocol is Synonym STA LSTR START LISTENER rCMDSCOPE 1 START LISTENER g 4 CMDSCOPE qmgr name Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 261 START LISTENER a 3 r PORT
83. internally by MOSeries are excluded P Display both active and in doubt threads but not regions If during command processing an active thread becomes in doubt it might appear twice once as active and once as in doubt that should check whether the designated queue manager is INACTIVE and if so report any shared units of work that were in progress on the designated and inactive queue manager This option is valid only for TYPE INDOUBT For more information about the DISPLAY THREAD command and in doubt recovery see the MQSerie Also see pesares CSQV406I 2 CSQV422I in the MQSeries far 05390 manual Note This command is issued internally by MOSeries when taking a checkpoint and when the queue manager is starting and stopping so that a list of threads that are in doubt at the time is written to the OS 390 console log Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 219 DISPLAY TRACE DISPLAY TRACE Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DISPLAY TRACE to display a list of active traces Synonym DIS TRACE DISPLAY TRACE DISPLAY TRACE CMDSCOPE 7 ACCTG GLOBAL L STAT CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 destination block constraint block comment string DETAIL output type
84. is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions You must specify the name of the namelist definition you want to display This can All namelist definitions be a specific namelist name or a generic namelist name By using a generic namelist name you can display either Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 181 DISPLAY NAMELIST One or more namelists that match the specified name generic namelist name The name of the namelist definition to be displayed see age 4 A trailing asterisk matches all namelists with the specified stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk on its own specifies all namelists The namelists must all be defined to the local queue manager ALL Specify this to display all the parameters If this parameter is specified any parameters that are requested specifically have no effect all the parameters are displayed This is the default if you do not specify a generic name and do not request any specific parameters CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if QSGDISP is set to GROUP i The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you sp
85. is not providing browse access CHANNEL The name of the channel that owns the handle If there is no channel associated with the handle this parameter is blank This parameter is returned only when the handle belongs to the channel initiator CONNAME The connection name associated with the channel that owns the handle If there is no channel associated with the handle this parameter is blank This parameter is returned only when the handle belongs to the channel initiator Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 197 DISPLAY QSTATUS INPUT Indicates whether the handle is providing input access to the queue The value is one of the following SHARED The handle is providing shared input access EXCL The handle is providing exclusive input access NO The handle is not providing input access INQUIRE Indicates whether the handle is providing inquire access to the queue The value is one of the following YES handle is providing inquire access NO The handle is not providing inquire access OUTPUT Indicates whether the handle is providing output access to the queue The value is one of the following YES handle is providing output access NO The handle is not providing output access PSBNAME The 8 character name of the program specification block PSB associated with the running IMS transaction You can use the PSBNAME and PSTID to purge the transaction using IMS commands This parameter is returned only when th
86. issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled COMMENT string Specifies a comment that is reproduced in the trace output record except in the resident trace tables It can be used to record why the command was issued string is any character string It must be enclosed in single quotation marks if it includes a blank comma or special character Destination block DEST Specifies where the trace output is to be recorded More than one value can be specified but do not use the same value twice The meaning of each value is as follows GTF The OS 390 Generalized Trace Facility GTF If used the GTF must be started and accepting user USR records before the START TRACE command is issued RES A wrap around table residing in the ECSA or a data space for RMID 231 SMF The System Management Facility SMF If used the SMF must be 266 MQSC Command Reference SRV START TRACE functioning before the START TRACE command is issued The SMF record numbers reserve
87. messages allowed 1 This command is valid only on OS 390 For other platforms use the MAXUMSGS parameter of the ALTER command instead Synonym DEF MAXSM DEFINE MAXSMSGS r CMDSCOPE DEFINE MAXSMSGS integer gt lt Notes 1 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 L CMDSCOPE Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions integer The maximum number of messages that a task can get or put within a single unit of recovery This value must be an integer in the range 1 through 999 999 999 The default value is 10 000 The number includes any trigger messages and report messages generated within the same unit of recovery CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 and must be blank or the local queue manager rA d The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The commands 93 DEFINE MAXSMSGS 94 MOQsSeries MOSC Command Reference You can specify a queue manager name
88. must be blank or the local queue manager if QSGDISP is set to GROUP 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which it was entered only if you are using a shared queue environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group DESCR description Plain text comment It provides descriptive information about the object when an operator issues the DISPLAY STGCLASS command It should contain only displayable characters The maximum length is 64 characters In a DBCS installation it can contain DBCS characters subject to a maximum length of 64 bytes Note If characters are used that are not in the coded character set identifier CCSID for this queue manager they might be translated incorrectly if the information is sent to another queue manager LIKE stgclass name The name of an object of the same type whose parameters will be used to model this definition If this field is not filled in and you do not complete the parameter fields re
89. of the queue manager DEFSOPT The default share option for applications opening this queue for input EXCL open request is for exclusive input from the queue SHARED The open request is for shared input from the queue DEFTYPE Queue definition type This parameter is supported only on model queues PERMDYN A permanent dynamic queue is created when an application issues an MOOPEN call with the name of this model queue specified in the object descriptor MOOD On OS 390 the dynamic queue has a disposition of OMGR SHAREDYN This option is available on OS 390 only A permanent dynamic queue is created when an application issues an MOOPEN call with the name of this model queue specified in the object descriptor MOOD The dynamic queue has a disposition of SHARED TEMPDYN A temporary dynamic queue is created when an application issues an MOOPEN call with the name of this model queue specified in the object descriptor MOOD On OS 390 the dynamic queue has a disposition of OMGR Do not specify this value for a model queue definition with a DEFPSIST parameter of YES If you specify this option do not specify INDXTYPE MSGTOKEN Chapter 2 The commands 117 Define queues DESCR string Plain text comment It provides descriptive information about the object when an operator issues the DISPLAY QUEUE command It should contain only displayable characters The maximum length is 6
90. on the local private channels on the private channels on all active queue manager named queue manager queue managers SHARED Common status for saved Not permitted Not permitted shared channels on all active queue managers in the queue sharing group ALL Common status for saved Common status for saved Common status for saved private channels on the local queue manager and saved shared channels in the queue sharing group private channels on the named queue manager private and shared channels on all active queue managers in the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 167 DISPLAY CLUSQMGR DISPLAY CLUSQMGR Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS d Dd Use DISPLAY CLUSOMGR to display a cluster information about queue managers in a cluster Notes 1 On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris 2 On OS 390 the command fails if the channel initiator has not been started Synonym DIS CLUSOMGR DISPLAY CLUSQMGR DISPLAY CLUSQMGR generic qmname ALL CHANNEL CMDSCOPE generic 1 Lour T generic name I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 CMDSCOPE 2 5 requested attrs H channel attrs Requested attrs gt lt CLUSDATE CLUSTIME DEFTYPE QMID QMTY
91. or not Which listeners are started and information about them How many dispatchers are started and how many were requested How many adapter subtasks are started and how many were requested The TCP system name How many channel connections are current and whether they are active stopped or retrying The maximum number of current connections 176 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY GROUP DISPLAY GROUP Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DISPLAY GROUP to display information about the queue sharing group to which the queue manager is connected Synonym DIS GROUP DISPLAY GROUP DISPLAY GROUP gt lt Usage notes 1 The response to the DISPLAY GROUP command is a series of messages containing information about the queue sharing group to which the queue manager is connected The following information is returned The name of the queue sharing group Whether all the queue managers that belong to the group are active or inactive The subsystem names of all the queue managers that belong to the group Information about all the structures Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 177 DISPLAY LOG DISPLAY LOG Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd 178 MQSC Command Reference Use DISPLAY
92. other than the queue manager on which it was entered only if you are using a shared queue environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group DEFINE NAMELIST DEFINE NAMELIST Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DEFINE NAMELIST to define list of names This is most commonly a list of cluster names or queue names Notes On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris 1 Synonym DEF NL DEFINE NAMELIST gt gt DEFINE NAMELIST name CMDSCOPE 7 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 2 gt lt CMDSCOPE r QSGDISP QMGR 1 2 define attrs namelist attrs 056015 1 d 2 QSGDISP GROUP Define attrs NOREPLACE ae ee L REPLACE Namelist attrs 3 r DESCR LDESCR string NAMES ane Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 3 This is the default supplied with MOSeries
93. parameter is valid only if TYPE HANDLE is also specified TYPE Specifies the type of status information required QUEUE Status information relating to queues is displayed This is the default if the TYPE parameter is not specified HANDLE Status information relating to the handles that are accessing the queues is displayed Queue status For queue status the following information is always returned for each queue that satisfies the selection criteria except where indicated Queue name Type of information returned TYPE parameter Chapter 2 The commands 195 DISPLAY QSTATUS Current queue depth CURDEPTH parameter Queue sharing group disposition OSGDISP parameter only if there is a queue sharing group environment The following parameters can be specified for TYPE QUEUE to request additional information for each queue If a parameter is specified that is not relevant for the queue operating environment or type of status information requested that parameter is ignored CURDEPTH The current depth of the queue that is the number of messages on the queue This includes both committed messages and uncommitted messages IPPROCS The number of handles that are currently open for input for the queue either input shared or input exclusive This does not include handles that are open for browse For shared queues the number returned applies only to the queue manager generating the reply Th
94. queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Chapter 2 The commands 21 ALTER CHANNEL Server connection channel ALTER CHANNEL 1 gt gt ALTER CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE SVRCONN rCMDSCOPE 7 ____ 4 2 8 L_AUTOSTART DISABLED CMDSCOPE qmgr name L ENABLED 8 L CMDSCOPE pescR string 3 waxMsL integer wcauser string HBINT integer r QSGDISP QMGR 4 gt 4 L QSGDISP COPY SCYDATA string PUTAUT DEF 8 ONLYMCA QSGDISP GROUP QSGDISP PRIVATE gt scvexit string 5 SENDDATA s tring gt 5 5 L_SENDEXIT string RCVDATA s tring gt 7 6 L L TRPTYPE DECNET 5 LU62 RCVEXIT CY string 7 NETBIOS 7 SPX Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 2 Valid only on Tandem NSK when TRPTYPE is LU62 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only on OS 390 22 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference ALTER CHANNEL You can specify more than one value on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL Open
95. queue this is the local name of the model queue to be deleted For a remote queue this is the local name of the remote queue to be deleted For a local queue this is the name of the local queue to be deleted You must specify which queue you want to delete Note A queue cannot be deleted if it contains uncommitted messages If an application has this queue open or has open a queue that eventually resolves to this queue the command fails The command also fails if this queue is a transmission queue and any queue that is or resolves to a remote queue that references this transmission queue is open If this queue has a SCOPE attribute of CELL the entry for the queue is also deleted from the cell directory CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if OSGDISP is set to GROUP or SHARED ax The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and
96. soon as possible The interval between retries might be extended if the channel has to wait to become active The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 Note For implementation reasons the maximum retry interval that can be used is 999 999 values exceeding this will be treated as 999 999 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR 82 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL MAXMSGL nteger Specifies the maximum message length that can be transmitted on the channel This is compared with the value for the partner and the actual maximum used is the lower of the two values The value zero means the maximum message length for the queue manager On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT specify a value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to the maximum message length for the queue manager See the MAXMSGL parameter of the ALTER command for more information On OS 390 specify a value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 100 On other platforms specify a value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 4 194 304 bytes 4 MB MCANAME string Message channel agent name This is reserved and if specified must only be set to blanks maximum length 20 characters MCATYPE Specifies whether the message channel agent pro
97. the INITO parameter This parameter is supported only on local and model queues FIRST Whenever the first message of priority equal to or greater than that specified by the TRIGMPRI parameter of the queue arrives on the queue EVERY Every time a message arrives on the queue with priority equal to or greater than that specified by the TRIGMPRI parameter of the queue DEPTH When the number of messages with priority equal to or greater than that specified by TRIGMPRI is equal to the number indicated by the TRIGDPTH parameter NONE No trigger messages are written This parameter can also be changed using the MOSET API call USAGE Queue usage This parameter is supported only on local and model queues NORMAL The queue is not a transmission queue The queue is a transmission queue which is used to hold messages that are destined for a remote queue manager When an application puts a message to a remote queue the message is stored on the appropriate transmission queue until it has been successfully transmitted and stored at the remote queue manager If you specify this option do not specify values for CLUSTER and CLUSNL and do not specify INDXTYPE MSGTOKEN XMITO string The name of the transmission queue to be used for forwarding messages to the remote queue for either a remote queue or for a queue manager alias definition This parameter is supported only on remote queues If XMITO is blank a queue wit
98. this parameter is specified Specify this to display all of the status information for each relevant instance If SAVED is specified this causes only common status information to be displayed not current only status information If this parameter is specified any parameters requesting specific status information that are also specified have no effect all of the information is displayed The following information is always returned for each set of status information The channel name The transmission queue name for sender and server channels The connection name 162 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY CHSTATUS The type of status information returned CURRENT SAVED or on OS 390 only SHORT STATUS except for SAVED on OS 390 e On 05 390 CHLDISP If no parameters requesting specific status information are specified and the ALL parameter is not specified no further information is returned If status information is requested which is not relevant for the particular channel type this is not an error Common status The following information applies to all sets of channel status whether or not the set is current The information applies to all channel types except server connection CURLUWID The logical unit of work identifier associated with the current batch for a sending or a receiving channel For a sending channel when the channel is in doubt it is the LUWID of the in doubt ba
99. when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions TRPTYPE Transmission protocol used This is optional TCP This is the default if TRPTYPE is not specified LU62 SNALU 62 CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 277 STOP LISTENER qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled INDISP Specifies the disposition of the inbound transmissions that the listener handles The possible values are QMGR Handling for transmissions directed to the queue manager This is the default GROUP Handling for transmissions directed to the queue sharing group This is allowed only if there is a shared queue manager environment IPADDR IP address for TCP IP specified in dotted decimal or alphanumeric form This is valid only if the transmission protocol TRPTYPE is TCP IP PORT The port number for TCP IP This is the port number on which the listener is to stop listening This is valid only if
100. while the command server is in a STOPPED or DISABLED state it starts the command server and allows it to process commands on the system command input queue mover commands and commands using CMDSCOPE immediately If the command server is in a RUNNING or WAITING state including the case when the command is issued through the command server itself or if the command server has been stopped automatically because the queue manager is closing down no action is taken the command server remains in its current state and an error message is returned to the command originator START CMDSERV can be used to restart the command server after it has been stopped either because of a serious error in handling command messages or commands using the CMDSCOPE parameter 260 MOSC Command Reference START LISTENER START LISTENER Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use START LISTENER to start a channel listener Notes 1 On UNIX systems the command is valid only for AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris 2 On OS 390 a This is valid only for channels used for distributed cape without CICS If you are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual b The command server and the channel initiator must be running c A total of four listener tasks can be started These are for TCP IP and LU62 with
101. 0 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Not valid on OS 390 5 You can specify more than one value on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only 6 X Valid only on OS 390 7 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS 8 Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT 9 X Valid only on AIX 10 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 16 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference Requester channel ALTER CHANNEL ALTER CHANNEL 1 gt gt ALTER CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE RQSTR gt 2 AUTOSTART DISABLED ENABLED r CMDSCOPE 8 gt gt garchsz integer 12 string I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 12 CMDSCOPE gt gt pEscR string 3 wAXMSGL integer NCANAME st ring HBINT integer 4 PROCESS TuREAD ncAUSER string 6 L MODENAME string 5 5 5 string LMREXIT string MRRTY integer gt gt 5 MRTMR integer 41 7 MSGDATA s tring gt gt 3 L L NPMSPEED FAST zi 7 NORMAL MSGEXIT string gt 5 6 PUTAUT DEF L PASSWORD string CTX 8 ONLYMCA 8 ALTMCA Chapter 2 The
102. 33 DISPLAY 190 CLWLLEN parameter ALTER OMGR 34 DISPLAY OMGR 190 CMDLEVEL parameter DISPLAY 190 CMDSCOPE parameter ALTER queue manager 34 ALTER SECURITY 46 ALTER TRACE 50 ARCHIVE LOG 51 CLEAR OLOCAL 54 DEFINE CHANNEL 77 DEFINE MAXSMSGS 93 DEFINE NAMELIST 96 DEFINE PROCESS 101 DEFINE queues 116 DEFINE STGCLASS 133 DELETE CHANNEL 137 DELETE NAMELIST 139 DELETE PROCESS 141 DELETE queues 146 DELETE STGCLASS 148 DISPLAY CHANNEL 153 DISPLAY CHSTATUS 161 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 170 DISPLAY DOM 175 DISPLAY LOG 178 DISPLAY MAXMSGS 180 DISPLAY NAMELIST 182 DISPLAY PROCESS 185 CMDSCOPE parameter continued DISPLAY 189 DISPLAY OSTATUS 195 DISPLAY QUEUE 204 DISPLAY SECURITY 213 DISPLAY STGCLASS 216 DISPLAY THREAD 218 DISPLAY TRACE 221 DISPLAY USAGE 223 MOVE QLOCAL 225 PING CHANNEL 229 RECOVER BSDS 232 REFRESH CLUSTER 233 REFRESH SECURITY 234 RESET CHANNEL 237 RESET CLUSTER 239 RESET OSTATS 242 RESET TPIPE 243 RESOLVE CHANNEL 246 RESOLVE INDOUBT 248 RESUME OMGR 250 RVERIFY SECURITY 251 SET LOG 252 START CHANNEL 255 START CHINIT 258 START TRACE 266 STOP CHANNEL 270 STOP CHINIT 274 STOP LISTENER 277 STOP OMGR 279 STOP TRACE 282 SUSPEND 284 coded character set identifier 32 command scripts building 2 command server display status 174 start 260 stop 276 command string entering quotes 2 preserving case 2 COMMANDO parameter DISPLAY 190 commands 285 rules for building 1 r
103. 34 5389 304 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference Q 5 34 5387 MOSeries LotusScript Extension SC34 5404 Softcopy books Most of the MQSeries books are supplied in both hardcopy and softcopy formats HTML format Relevant MQSeries documentation is provided in HTML format with these MOSeries products e for AIX V5 1 e MOSeries for AS 400 V5 1 e MOsSeries for Compaq Tru64 UNIX V5 1 e MOSeries for HP UX V5 1 e for OS 2 Warp V5 1 e MOSeries for OS 390 V5 2 e MOSeries for Sun Solaris V5 1 e for Windows NT V5 1 compiled HTML e MQSeries link for R 3 V1 2 The books are also available in HTML format from the product family Web site at http www ibm com software mqseries Portable Document Format PDF PDF files can be viewed and printed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader If you need to obtain the Adobe Acrobat Reader or would like up to date information about the platforms on which the Acrobat Reader is supported visit the Adobe Systems Inc Web site at http www adobe com PDF versions of relevant books supplied with these MOSeries products e MOSeries for AIX V5 1 e MOSeries for AS 400 V5 1 e MOsSeries for Compaq Tru64 UNIX V5 1 e MOSeries for HP UX V5 1 e for OS 2 Warp V5 1 e MOSeries for OS 390 V5 2 e MOSeries for Sun Solaris V5 1 e MOSer
104. 4 characters In a DBCS installation it can contain DBCS characters subject to a maximum length of 64 bytes Note If characters are used that are not in the coded character set identifier CCSID for this queue manager they might be translated incorrectly if the information is sent to another queue manager DISTL Whether distribution lists are supported by the partner queue manager YES Distribution lists are supported by the partner queue manager NO Distribution lists are not supported by the partner queue manager Note You should not normally change this parameter because it is set by the MCA However you can set this parameter when defining a transmission queue if the distribution list capability of the destination queue manager is known This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT FORCE This parameter applies only to the ALTER command on alias local and remote queues Specify this parameter to force completion of the command in the following circumstances For an alias queue if both of the following are true e The TARGO parameter is specified An application has this alias queue open For a local queue if both of the following are true The NOSHARE parameter is specified One or more applications have the queue open for input FORCE is also needed if both of the following are true The USAGE parameter is changed Either one or more messages are on the queue or on
105. 40 DEALLCT NOLIMIT DEFAULT r CMDSCOPE 7 gt lt 1 CMDSCOPE qmgr name Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 JA The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled MAXRTU integer Specifies the maximum number of dedicated tape units that can be allocated to read archive log tape volumes This overrides the value for MAXRTU set by CSQ6LOGP in the archive system parameters This together with the DEALLCT parameter allows MQSeries to optimize archive log reading from tape devices Notes 1 The integer value can range from 1 to 99 252 MQSC Command Reference SET LOG 2 If the number specified is greater than the current specification the maximum number of tape units allowable for reading archive log
106. 400 language that can be used to issue commands either at the command line or by writing a CL program controlled shutdown See quiesced shutdown CPF Command prefix coupling facility On OS 390 a special logical partition that provides high speed caching list processing and locking functions in a parallel sysplex Glossary D DAE Dump analysis and elimination data conversion interface DCI The MQSeries interface to which customer or vendor written programs that convert application data between different machine encodings and CCSIDs must conform A part of the MQSeries Framework datagram The simplest message that MQSeries supports This type of message does not require a reply DCE Distributed Computing Environment DCI Data conversion interface dead letter queue DLQ A queue to which a queue manager or application sends messages that it cannot deliver to their correct destination dead letter queue handler An MQSeries supplied utility that monitors a dead letter queue DLO and processes messages on the queue in accordance with a user written rules table default object A definition of an object for example a queue with all attributes defined If a user defines an object but does not specify all possible attributes for that object the queue manager uses default attributes in place of any that were not specified deferred connection A pending event that is activated when a CICS subsystem trie
107. 5 QSGDISP GROUP I QSGDISP PRIVATE 5 _QSGDISP SHARED STGCLASS 2 gt lt queue type Requested attrs requested attrs H Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 201 DISPLAY QUEUE 1 Y__ALTDATE 1 ALTTIME BOQNAME BOTHRESH 1 CLUSDATE 1 CLUSQMGR 1 CLUSQT 1 CLUSTIME CRDATE CRTIME CURDEPTH 1 DEFBIND DEFPRTY F DEFPSIST DEFSOPT DEFTYPE DESCR 3 DISTL GET F HARDENBO 2 INDXTYPE INITQ IPPROCS MAXDEPTH MAXMSGL r MSGDLVSQ OPPROCS PROCESS PUT QDEPTHHI QDEPTHLO QDPHIEV QDPLOEV QDPMAXEV 1 QMID QSVCIEV QSVCINT QTYPE RETINTVL RNAME RQMNAME 4 SCOPE SHARE TARGQ TRIGDATA TRIGDPTH TRIGGER TRIGMPRI t USAGE XMITQ 202 MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY QUEUE Notes 1 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 2 Valid only on OS 390 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Not valid on OS 390 or OS 400 5 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions You must specify the name of the queue definit
108. 8 166 168 169 174 174 175 iii Parameter descriptions Usage notes DISPLAY GROUP Usage notes DISPLAY LOG Parameter descriptions Usage notes DISPLAY MAXSMSGS Parameter descriptions DISPLAY NAMELIST Parameter descriptions DISPLAY PROCESS Parameter descriptions DISPLAY OMGR Parameter descriptions DISPLAY OSTATUS Parameter descriptions DISPLAY QUEUE Parameter descriptions DISPLAY SECURITY Parameter descriptions DISPLAY STGCLASS Parameter descriptions DISPLAY THREAD Parameter descriptions DISPLAY TRACE Parameter descriptions DISPLAY USAGE Parameter descriptions MOVE QLOCAL Parameter descriptions Usage notes PING CHANNEL Parameter descriptions PING OMGR RECOVER BSDS Parameter descriptions REFRESH CLUSTER Parameter descriptions REFRESH SECURITY Parameter descriptions RESET CHANNEL Parameter descriptions RESET CLUSTER Parameter descriptions RESET OSTATS Parameter descriptions Usage notes RESET TPIPE Parameter descriptions RESOLVE CHANNEL Parameter descriptions Usage notes RESOLVE INDOUBT Parameter descriptions RESUME Parameter descriptions iV MOQSeries MOSC Command Reference 175 176 2177 177 178 178 178 180 180 181 181 184 185 187 189 193 194 200 203
109. COPE __ 1 STOP CHANNEL channel name gt FORCE 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 CMDSCOPE CHLDISP PRIVATE 1 gt gt lt 2 L CHLDISP SHARED Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions channel name The name of the channel to be stopped This is required 270 MQSC Command Reference STOP CHANNEL CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group If CHLDISP is set to SHARED CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager Fa The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group CHLDISP
110. E CHANNEL name QSGDISP COPY Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 137 DELETE CHANNEL 138 Command Reference The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value DELETE NAMELIST DELETE NAMELIST Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DELETE NAMELIST to delete a namelist definition Notes 1 On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris Synonym DELETE NL DELETE NAMELIST rCMDSCOPE 7 __ 1 gt gt DELETE NAMELIST name gt 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP QMGR 1 gt lt L QSGDISP COPY 2 QSGDISP GROUP Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions You must specify which namelist definition you want to delete name The name of the namelist definition to be deleted The name must be defined to the local queue manager If an application has thi
111. G APPLTYPE ASID BROWSE CHANNEL INPUT INQUIRE OUTPUT PSBNAME PSTID QSGDISP SET TASKNO 3 TRANSID 4 URID USERID Notes 1 2 3 4 5 Channel initiator only IMS only CICS only RRSBATCH only Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions You must specify the name of the queue for which you want to display status information This can be a specific queue name or a generic queue name By using a generic queue name you can display either Status information for all queues or Status information for one or more queues that match the specified name and other selection criteria You must also specify whether you want status information about Queues Handles that are accessing the queues Note You cannot use the DISPLAY OSTATUS command to display the status of an alias queue or remote queue If you specify the name of one of these types of queue no data is returned You can however specify the name of the local queue or transmission queue to which the queue resolves generic q name The name of the queue for which status information is to be displayed A trailing asterisk matches all queues with the specified stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk 194 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY QSTATUS on its own matches all queues
112. GL 2 MSGS 1 NPMSPEED SHORTRTS L STOPREQ Short status 3 Notes 1 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 2 Ignored if specified on OS 390 3 Valid only on OS 390 4 only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions You must specify the name of the channel for which you want to display status information This can be a specific channel name or a generic channel name By using a generic channel name you can display either Status information for all channels or Status information for one or more channels that match the specified name You may also specify whether you want The current status data of current channels only or The saved status data of all channels 158 MOSeries MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY CHSTATUS Status for all channels that meet the selection criteria is given whether the channels were defined manually or automatically Before explaining the syntax and options for this command it is necessary to describe the format of the status data that is available for channels and the states that channels can have There are three classes of data available for channel status These are saved current and on OS 390 only short The status fields available for saved
113. HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 3 Used only on OS 390 4 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 5 This is the default supplied with except on OS 390 where it is EXCL but your installation might have changed it 6 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 109 DEFINE QLOCAL 7 This is the default supplied with except on OS 390 where it is 999 999 999 but your installation might have changed it 8 This is the default supplied with except on OS 390 where it is NOSHARE but your installation might have changed it 9 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp UNIX systems and Windows NT DEFINE QMODEL Use DEFINE OMODEL to define a new model queue and set its parameters A model queue is not a real queue but a collection of attributes that you can use when creating dynamic queues with the MOOPEN call When it has been defined a model queue like any other queue has a complete set of applicable attributes even if some of these are defaults Synonym DEF OM DEFINE QMODEL r CMDSCOPEC 1 056015 0 6 1 DEFINE QMODEL q name gt 2 2 CMDSCOPE qmgr name QSGDISP COPY 2 2 CMDSCOPE
114. IME 2 AUTOSTART 1 BATCHSZ CHLTYPE 1 CLUSTER 1 p CLUSNL CONNAME CONVERT DESCR DISCINT 1 HBINT LONGRTY LONGTMR MAXMSGL MCANAME 1 FM CATYPE MCAUSER MODENAME 3 MRDATA 3 MREXIT 3 MRRTY 3 MRTMR MSGDATA MSGEXIT 1 NETPRTY 1 NPMSPEED PASSWORD PUTAU QMNAME RCVDATA RCVEXIT SCYDATA SCYEXIT LSENDDATA SENDEXIT SEQWRAP SHORTRTY SHORTTMR TPNAME TRPTYPE USERID LxMITQ Notes 1 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Valid only on Tandem NSK Not valid on OS 390 Valid only on OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 151 DISPLAY CHANNEL 5 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions You must specify the name of the channel definition you want to display This can be a specific channel name or a generic channel name By using a generic channel name you can display either channel definitions One or more channel definitions that match the specified name generic channel name The name of the channel definition to be displayed see age 4 A trailing asterisk matches all channel definitions with the specifi
115. LIZI RUNNING The channel is either transferring messages at this moment or is waiting for messages to arrive on the transmission queue so that they can be transferred STOPPING Channel is stopping or a close request has been received RETRYING A previous attempt to establish a connection has failed The MCA will reattempt connection after the specified time interval PAUSED The channel is waiting for the message retry interval to complete before retrying an MOPUT operation This is not valid on OS 390 STOPPED This state can be caused by one of the following Channel manually stopped A user has entered a stop channel command against this channel Retry limit reached The MCA has reached the limit of retry attempts at establishing a connection No further attempt will be made to establish a connection automatically 164 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY CHSTATUS A channel in this state can be restarted only by issuing the START CHANNEL command or starting the MCA program in an operating system dependent manner REQUESTING A local requester channel is requesting services from a remote MCA On O5 390 STATUS is not displayed if saved data is requested Note For an inactive channel CURMSGS CURSEONO and CURLUWID have meaningful information only if the channel is INDOUBT However they are still displayed and returned if requested Current only status The following information applies only to current ch
116. LOG to display archive log information Synonym DIS LOG DISPLAY LOG Notes r CMDSCOPE gt lt 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 ax The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name Usage notes The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group DISPLAY LOG returns a report that shows The system parameter values for the Maximum number of dedicated tape units that can be set to read archive log tape volumes MAXRTU Length of time that an allowed archive read tape unit remains unused be
117. MODEL 117 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 170 DISPLAY QUEUE 209 DEFXMITO parameter ALTER OMGR 34 DISPLAY OMGR 191 DELETE CHANNEL command 136 DELETE NAMELIST command 139 DELETE PROCESS command 141 DELETE QALIAS command 143 DELETE OLOCAL command 144 DELETE OMODEL command 145 DELETE OREMOTE command 145 DELETE STGCLASS command 148 DESCR parameter ALTER OMGR 34 DEFINE CHANNEL 80 DEFINE NAMELIST 96 DEFINE PROCESS 101 DEFINE queues 118 DEFINE STGCLASS 133 DESCR parameter continued DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 DISPLAY NAMELIST 183 DISPLAY PROCESS 186 DISPLAY OMGR 191 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 DISPLAY STGCLASS 217 DEST parameter DISPLAY TRACE 222 START TRACE 266 STOP TRACE 282 DETAIL parameter DISPLAY TRACE 221 DISCINT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 81 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 DISPLAY CHANNEL command 150 DISPLAY CHSTATUS command 157 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR command 168 DISPLAY CMDSERV command 174 DISPLAY DOM command 175 DISPLAY GROUP command 177 DISPLAY LOG command 178 DISPLAY MAXSMSGS command 180 DISPLAY NAMELIST command 181 DISPLAY PROCESS command 184 DISPLAY command 187 DISPLAY OSTATUS command 193 DISPLAY QUEUE command 200 DISPLAY SECURITY command 213 DISPLAY STGCLASS command 215 DISPLAY THREAD command 218 DISPLAY TRACE command 220 DISPLAY USAGE command 223 DISTL parameter DEFINE queues 118 DISPLAY OMGR 191 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 dual BSDS reestablish 232 E ENVPARM p
118. MQSeries LITE MQSC Command Reference SC33 1369 13 MQSeries LITE MQSC Command Reference SC33 1369 13 Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information under Appendix Fourteenth edition November 2000 This edition applies to the following products MOSeries for AIX Version 5 1 e for AS 400 Version 5 Release 1 e MOSeries for AT amp T GIS UNIX Version 2 Release 2 e MOSeries for Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS AXP Version 2 Release 2 1 e MOSeries for Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS VAX Version 2 Release 2 1 e MOSeries for Compaq Tru64 UNIX Version 5 Release 1 e MOGeries for HP UX Version 5 1 MQsSeries for OS 2 Warp Version 5 1 e MOSeries for OS 390 Version 5 Release 2 e MOSeries for SINIX and DC OSx Version 2 Release 2 e MOSeries for Sun Solaris Version 5 1 e MOQGeries for Sun Solaris Intel Platform Edition Version 5 Release 1 e MOSeries for Tandem NonStop Kernel Version 2 Release 2 0 1 e MOSeries for Windows NT Version 5 1 and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1993 2000 rights reserved US Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by 5 ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Tables About this book Who this book is for What you need to know to u
119. NAME contains a side object name in which case it should be set to blanks The actual name is taken instead from the CPI C Communications Side Object or the APPC side information data set See the information about configuration parameters for an LU 6 2 2 2 for more information On Windows NT SNA Server and in the side object on OS 390 the TPNAME is wrapped to upper case This parameter is not valid for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of RCVR TRPTYPE Transport type to be used Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 91 DEFINE CHANNEL On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT this parameter is optional because if you do not enter a value the value specified in the SYSTEM DEF channel type definition is used However no check is made that the correct transport type has been specified if the channel is initiated from the other end On OS 390 if the SYSTEM DEF channel type definition does not exist the default is LU62 This is required on all other platforms DECNET DECnet supported only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS LU62 SNALU 62 NETBIOS NetBIOS supported only on OS 2 Warp Windows Windows NT and DOS it also applies to OS 390 for defining client connection channels that will connect to servers on the platforms supporting NetBIOS SPX Sequenced packet exchange supported only OS 2 Warp Windows Windows NT and DOS it also applies to OS 390 for defining client connection
120. NEL MODE FORCE See STOP CHANNEL on page 270 for information about what this involves You might receive communications error messages as a result of issuing the STOP CHINIT command Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 275 STOP CMDSERV STOP CMDSERV Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use STOP CMDSERV to stop the command server Synonym STOP CS STOP CMDSERV STOP CMDSERV gt lt Usage notes 1 STOP CMDSERV stops the command server from processing commands in the system command input queue SYSTEM COMMAND INPUT mover commands and commands using CMDSCOPE If this command is issued through the initialization files or through the operator console before work is released to the queue manager that is before the command server is started automatically it prevents the command server from starting automatically and puts it into a DISABLED state It overrides an earlier START CMDSERV command If this command is issued through the operator console or the command server while the command server is in a RUNNING state it stops the command server when it has finished processing its current command When this happens the command server enters the STOPPED state If this command is issued through the operator console while the command server is in a WAITING state it stops the command server immediately When this happens the
121. NO version as in REPLACE NOREPLACE is also not allowed Strings that contain blanks lowercase characters or special characters other than Period Forward slash Underscore Percent sign 76 must be enclosed in single quotation marks unless they are Issued from the for OS 390 operations and control panels Generic names ending with an asterisk on OS 400 these must be enclosed in single quotation marks Rules for using commands A single asterisk for example TRACE on OS 400 these must be enclosed in single quotation marks Arange specification containing a colon for example CLASS 01 03 If the string itself contains a quotation mark the quotation mark is represented by two single quotation marks Lowercase characters not contained within quotation marks are folded to uppercase e string containing no characters that is two single quotation marks with no space in between is not valid A left parenthesis followed by a right parenthesis with no significant information in between for example NAME is not valid except where specifically noted Keywords are not case sensitive AItER alter and ALTER are all acceptable Names that are not contained within quotation marks are converted to uppercase Synonyms are defined for some parameters For example DEF is always a synonym for DEFINE so DEF QLOCAL is valid Synonyms not however just mi
122. Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions You must specify which process definition you want to delete process name The name of the process definition to be deleted The name must be defined to the local queue manager If an application has this process open the command fails CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if OSGDISP is set to GROUP 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 141 DELETE PROCESS QSGDISP You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group This parameter applies to OS 390 only
123. OS 2 Warp UNIX systems and Windows NT 4 Valid only on OS 390 5 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 107 DEFINE QLOCAL DEFINE QLOCAL Use DEFINE QLOCAL to define a new local queue and set its parameters Synonym DEF OL DEFINE QLOCAL r CMDSCOPE 3 p QSGDISP QMGR 3 DEFINE QLOCAL q name gt 4 4 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name QSGDISP COPY 4 4 L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP GROUP 4 L QSGDISP SHARED lt define attrs common q attrs H local q attrs F Define attrs NOREPLACE Li qtocat name LREPLACE Common q attrs 1 1 1 1 DEFPRTY 0 DEFPSIST NO DESCR PUT ENABLED DEFPRTY integer DEFPSIST YES L DESCR string L PUT DISABLED Local q attrs 1 1 3 1 2 BOQNAME BOTHRESH 0 CFSTRUCT r CLUSNL 2 BOQNAME string L BOTHRESH integer 3 2 L CFSTRUCT name L CLUSNL n name 1 2 1 2 5 r CLUSTER DEFBIND OPEN DEFSOPT SHARED gt 2 2 _DEFSOPT EXCL L CLUSTER clustername L DEFBIND NOTFIXED 1 6 1 1 3 DISTL NO GET ENABLED INDXTYPE NONE
124. OSTATUS 197 ARCHIVE LOG command 51 ASID parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 197 AUTHOREV parameter ALTER OMGR 32 DISPLAY 190 auto definition exit program 32 190 auto definition of channels 32 190 AUTOSTART parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 76 DISPLAY CHANNEL 154 backing up thelog 51 BATCHES parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 BATCHINT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 76 DISPLAY CHANNEL 154 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 BATCHSZ parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 76 DISPLAY CHANNEL 154 DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 bibliography 303 BookManager 305 bootstrap data set recover 232 BOONAME parameter DEFINE queues 114 DISPLAY QUEUE 208 BOTHRESH parameter DEFINE queues 114 DISPLAY QUEUE 208 BROWSE parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 197 BSDS recover 232 buffer pool defining 56 BUFFERS parameter DEFINE BUFFPOOL 56 BUFFPOOL parameter DEFINE PSID 105 BUFSRCVD parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 BUFSSENT parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 building command scripts 2 building commands characters with special meanings 2 rules for 1 BYTSRCVD parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 BYTSSENT parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 C CANCEL OFFLOAD parameter ARCHIVE LOG 51 CCSID parameter ALTER OMGR 32 DISPLAY OMGR 190 CFSTRUCT parameter DEFINE queues 115 DISPLAY QUEUE 203 CHAD parameter ALTER OMGR 32 DISPLAY OMGR 190 CHADEV parameter ALTER OMGR 32 DISPLAY OMGR 190 CHADEXIT parameter ALTER OMGR 33 DISPLAY OMGR 190 channel alter parameters 10 auto definition
125. OUT values respectively If the PERFMEV attribute of the queue manager is DISABLED the command fails 242 MOQsSeries MOSC Command Reference RESET RESET TPIPE Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use RESET to reset the recoverable sequence numbers for an IMS used by the MOSeries IMS bridge Notes 1 This command is used in response to the resynchronization error reported in message CSQ2020E and initiates resynchronization of the Tpipe with IMS 2 member 3 member but the Tpipe is open 4 data sets The command fails if the queue manager is not connected to the specified XCF The command fails if the queue manager is connected to the specified XCF RESET TPIPE cannot be issued from the CSQINP1 and CSOINTP2 initialization Synonym There is no synonym for this command RESET TPIPE RESET TPIPE tpipe name 7 XCFMNAME mname CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 0 SENDSEQ X integer 1 gt LRCVSEQ X integer J L XCFGNAME m Notes 1 Parameter descriptions tpipe name gt lt Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group The name of the Tpipe to be reset This is required CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies ho
126. PE STATUS SUSPEND Channel attrs 168 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY CLUSQMGR ALTDATE ALTTIME BATCHSZ CONNAME CONVERT DESCR DISCINT HBINT LONGRTY LONGTMR MAXMSGL MCANAME MCAT Y PE MCAUSER MODENAME 3 3 MREXIT 3 MRRTY 3 MRTMR MSGDATA MSGEXIT NETPRTY NPMSPEED 3 PASSWORD PUTAUT RCVDATA RCVEXIT SCYDATA SCYEXIT SENDDATA SENDEXIT LSEQWRAP SHORTRTY SHORTTMR TPNAME TRPTYPE 3 USERID Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 3 Not valid on OS 390 Parameter descriptions generic qmname The name of the cluster queue manager to be displayed A trailing asterisk matches all cluster queue managers with the specified stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk on its own specifies all cluster queue managers ALL Specify this to cause all parameters to be displayed If this parameter is specified any parameters that are also requested specifically have no effect Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 169 DISPLAY CLUSQMGR all parameters are still displayed This is the default if you do not specify a gener
127. PERSISTENT and so are not included in the batch unit of work NORMAL Normal delivery for nonpersistent messages 86 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL If the sending side and the receiving side do not agree about this parameter or one does not support it NORMAL is used This parameter is valid only for channels with a CHLTYPE of SDR SVR RCVR ROSTR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR It is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT PASSWORD string Password maximum length 12 characters This is used by the message channel agent when attempting to initiate a secure LU 6 2 session with a remote message channel agent This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR ROSTR CLNTCONN or CLUSSDR It is supported only on OS 390 for client connection channels Although the maximum length of the parameter is 12 characters only the first 10 characters are used PUTAUT Specifies which user identifiers should be used to establish authority to put messages to the destination queue for messages channels or to execute an MOI call for MOI channels DEF The default user ID is used On OS 390 this might involve using both the user ID received from the network and that derived from MCAUSER CTX The user ID from the UserIdentifier field of the message descriptor is used On OS 390 this might involve also using the user ID received from the network or that
128. PLAY QUEUE 206 DISPLAY THREAD 219 MOVE QLOCAL 226 U UNCOM parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 196 unit of work ID display 218 URID parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 199 usage page set display 223 USAGE parameter DEFINE queues 130 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 USERDATA parameter DEFINE PROCESS 103 DISPLAY PROCESS 186 USERID parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 92 DISPLAY CHANNEL 156 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 DISPLAY OSTATUS 199 DISPLAY TRACE 222 START TRACE 269 STOP TRACE 283 using commands rules for 1 W WAIT parameter ARCHIVE LOG 52 Windows Help 305 X XCFGNAME parameter DEFINE STGCLASS 135 DISPLAY STGCLASS 217 RESET TPIPE 244 XCFMNAME parameter DEFINE STGCLASS 135 DISPLAY STGCLASS 217 RESET TPIPE 244 XMITO parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 92 DEFINE QREMOTE 130 DISPLAY CHANNEL 156 DISPLAY CHSTATUS 160 DISPLAY QUEUE 212 312 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference Sending your comments to If you especially like or dislike anything about this book please use one of the methods listed below to send your comments to IBM Feel free to comment on what you regard as specific errors or omissions and on the accuracy organization subject matter or completeness of this book Please limit your comments to the information in this book and the way in which the information is presented To make comments about the functions of IBM products or systems talk to your IBM representative or to your IBM authorized remarketer When you se
129. Parameter descriptions 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 CLUSTER clustername The name of the cluster to suspend availability for CLUSNL nlname The name of the namelist specifying a list of clusters to suspend availability for CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group 284 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference SUSPEND QMGR You can specify queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled MODE Specifies how the suspension of availability is to take effect QUIESCE Other queue managers in the cluster are advised that the local queue manager should not be sent further messages FORCE inbound channels to other queue managers in the cluster stopped forcibly This occurs only if the queue manager has also been forcibly suspended from all other clusters to which the channel belongs Chapter 2 The commands
130. S 390 60 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL Server channel DEFINE CHANNEL 1 3 4 gt gt DEFINE CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE SVR TRPTYPE DECNET XMITQ string 1062 5 NETBIOS 5 SPX TCP 6 UDP 7 8 9 8 AUTOSTART DISABLED BATCHINT 0 BATCHSZ 50 P 7 9 BATCHSZ integer L AUTOSTART ENABLED BATCHINT integer 8 8 r CMDSCOPE 2 CONNAME CONVERT NO gt 14 L CONNAME string CONVERT YES I CMDSCOPE gmgr name 14 L CMDSCOPE 8 8 8 9 DESCR DISCINT 6000 HBINT 300 LDESCR string DISCINT integer 9 Li tke channel name J LHBINT integer 8 8 8 r LONGRTY 999 999 999 LONGTMR 1200 MAXMSGL 4 194 304 L LONGRTY integer LONGTMR integer L MAXMSGL integer P L MCANAME J 8 10 8 8 11 r MCATYPE PROCESS MODENAME gt 10 MCAUSER string 11 L MCATYPE THREAD L MODENAME string 8 8 rMSGDATA MSGEXIT 7 NOREPLACE 7j REPLACE 12 12 L MSGDATA
131. S 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 5 Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 6 You can specify more than one value on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only 7 Not valid on OS 390 8 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS 9 X Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT 10 Valid only on AIX 11 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 12 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference ALTER CHANNEL Server channel ALTER CHANNEL 1 gt gt ALTER CHANNEL channel CHLTYPE SVR gt 2 L AUTOSTART DISABLED 29 L ENABLED 7 CMDSCOPE 7 _ 5 gt gt 3 L_saTcHsz integer 12 BATCHINT integer CMDSCOPE qmgr name 12 CMDSCOPE gt gt L coNNAME string Lconvenr 10 Loescr string Loiscint integer YES gt gt 3 integer integer HBINT integer gt gt waxMsGL integer string 4 MCATYPE PROCESS THREAD gt gt L wcAUSER string 6 MODENAME string gt gt 7 7 MSGDATA string MSGEXIT string gt gt 3 6 8 L NPMSPEED FAST T PASSWORD s
132. SENDEXIT 7 7 7 L SCYEXIT string r SEQWRAP 999 999 999 SHORTRTY 10 SHORTTMR 60 11 11 SENDDATA X string SENDEXIT string 7 7 7 L_SEQWRAP integer SHORTRTY integer SHORTTMR integer TPNAME 7 10 LTPNAME string USERID 10 7 10 12 gt lt LUSERID string 10 12 Notes 1 Q m 10 11 12 13 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on 05 390 Valid only OS 390 This is not mandatory on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT Valid only on AIX This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 You can specify more than one value only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Not valid on OS 390 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 59 DEFINE CHANNEL You can use queue sharing groups only on for O
133. SET ERROR The string consists of two numeric characters in the range 00 through 99 See QSGDISP Specifies the disposition of the object in the group QSGDISP ALTER DEFINE COPY The object definition resides on the page set The object is defined on the page set of the of the queue manager that executes the queue manager that executes the command command The object was defined using a using the QSGDISP GROUP object of the command that had the parameters same name as the object OSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR is not affected by this command GROUP The object definition resides in the shared The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a command that had the parameters OSGDISP GROUD Any object residing on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command except a local copy of the object is not affected by this command If the command is successful the following command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the queue sharing group to cause them to refresh local copies on page set 0 DEFINE STGCLASS name REPLACE QSGDISP COPY repository This is allowed only if the queue manager is in a queue sharing group If the definition is successful the following command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the qu
134. Series Clientd GC33 1632 e MQSeries System Administration SC33 1873 e MQSeries MQSC Command Referencd SC33 1369 e IMQSeries Event Monitoring SC34 5760 SC33 0807 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 SC33 1673 e MQSeries Programming Interfaces Reference Summary SX33 6095 5 34 5604 MQSeries platform specific publications Each MOSeries product is documented in at least one platform specific publication in addition to the MOSeries family books MOSeries for AIX V5 1 GC33 1867 MOSeries for AS 400 V5 1 SC34 5559 Meses for AT amp T GIS alus V2 2 MOSeries for ae DIGITAL OpenVMS V2 2 1 1 GC33 1869 MOSeries for OS 2 Warp V5 1 p Beginningd GC33 1868 303 Bibliography MOSeries for OS 390 V5 2 GC34 5650 emi SC34 5651 GC34 5891 for OS 390 Licensed Program Specifications GC34 5893 MOQSeries for OS 390 Program Directory MOSeries link for R 3 Version 1 2 MOSeries link for R Ise uide GC33 1934 MOSeries for SINIX DC OSx V2 2 MOSeries for Sun Solaris V5 1 Beginnings GC33 1870 MOSeries for Sun Solaris Intel Platform Edition V5 1 MOSeries for VSE ESA V2 1 MOQSeries for VSE ESA Version 2 Release 1 Licensed Program Specifications GC34 5365 p Managemen Ade 5 MOSeries for Windows V2 1 IVOSeries for Winda 2 GC33 1965 MOSeries for Windows NT V5 1 Beginnings GC
135. Series commands 37 ALTER QMGR If both REPOS and REPOSNL are blank or REPOS is blank and the namelist specified by REPOSNL is empty this queue manager does not have a full repository but might be a client of other repository services that are defined in the cluster This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT STRSTPEV Whether start and stop events are generated ENABLED Start and stop events are generated This is the queue manager s initial default value DISABLED Start and stop events are not generated TRIGINT integer A time interval expressed in milliseconds TRIGINT parameter is relevant only if the trigger type is set to FIRST see for details In this case trigger messages are normally generated when a suitable message arrives on the queue and the queue was previously empty Under certain circumstances however an additional trigger message can be generated with FIRST triggering even if the queue was not empty These additional trigger messages are not generated more often than every TRIGINT milliseconds See the MQSerie for more information Do not specify a value less than zero or greater than 999 999 999 38 MOQSeries MOSC Command Reference ALTER Queues ALTER Queues This section contains the following commands These queues are supported on the following platforms
136. T The commands are described in alphabetic order in At the start of each command description the platforms on which you can use the command are shown The term UNIX systems is used to denote the following UNIX operating systems e MOSeries for AIX MOSeries for AT amp T GIS UNIX e MOSeries for Compaq Tru64 UNIX e MOSeries for HP UX e MOSeries for SINIX DC OSx e MOGeries for Sun Solaris SPARC and Intel Platform Editions Who this book is for This book is intended for system programmers system administrators and system operators What you need to know to understand this book To understand this book you should be familiar with the system facilities for the platform on which you are installing the MOSeries product If you are unfamiliar with the concepts of messaging and queuing you should read Introduction to Messaging and Queuing How to use this book For platforms other than OS 390 read those sections of the MOSeries Administration Guide System Management Guide or System Administration book for your platform that relate to the task you want to perform uide or both that relate to the task you For OS 390 read the sections of the want to perform These books are listed in 1 This platform has been renamed to NCR UNIX SVR4 MP RAS R3 0 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 Vii About this book When you have decided which commands you need to use use this
137. T parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 87 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSQMGR 172 Q QDEPTHHI parameter DEFINE QLOCAL 123 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 QDEPTHLO parameter DEFINE QLOCAL 123 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 QDPHIEV parameter DEFINE queues 123 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 QDPLOEV parameter DEFINE queues 123 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 QDPMAXEV parameter DEFINE queues 124 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 QMID parameter DISPLAY CLUSQMGR 171 DISPLAY QMGR 192 parameter continued DISPLAY QUEUE 211 OMNAME parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 87 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY OMGR 192 DISPLAY THREAD 219 RESET CLUSTER 240 RESOLVE INDOUBT 249 parameter DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 171 OSGDISP parameter CLEAR OLOCAL 55 DEFINE CHANNEL 87 DEFINE NAMELIST 97 DEFINE PROCESS 102 DEFINE queues 124 DEFINE STGCLASS 134 DELETE CHANNEL 137 DELETE NAMELIST 139 DELETE PROCESS 141 DELETE OLOCAL 147 DELETE STGCLASS 149 DISPLAY CHANNEL 153 DISPLAY NAMELIST 182 DISPLAY PROCESS 185 DISPLAY OSTATUS 196 198 DISPLAY QUEUE 204 DISPLAY STGCLASS 216 MOVE QLOCAL 226 OSGNAME parameter DISPLAY OMGR 192 OSVCIEV parameter DEFINE queues 125 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 OSVCINT parameter DEFINE queues 126 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 parameter DISPLAY QUEUE 211 queue attributes display 200 queue manager alter parameters 30 display parameters 187 ping 231 resume 250 start 264 stop 279 suspend 284 queue manager alias defining 113 queue names 4 queue status displaying 193 reset 241 queue
138. TAL OpenVMS Use ALTER PROCESS to alter the parameters of existing process definition Synonym ALT PRO ALTER PROCESS gt gt ALTER PROCESS process name LaPPLICID string L appLTYPE Linteger jJ CICS DEF DOS IMS MVS I NOTESAGENTA NSK 052 05400 UNIX VMS WINDOWS WINDOWSNT r CMDSCOPE 2 1 pescR string J ENVRDATA string I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE r QSGDISP QMGR 2 gt lt QSGDISP COPY USERDATA string 1 I QSGDISP GROUP QSGDISP PRIVATE Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 2 Valid only on OS 390 Parameter descriptions For a description of the parameters see D Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 29 ALTER QMGR ALTER QMGR Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use ALTER to alter the queue manager parameters for the local queue manager Synonym ALT OMGR ALTER QMGR CMDSCOPE 3 ALTER qmgr attrs CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 CMDSCOPE attrs gt TT CCSID integer 1 AUTHOREV
139. TAL OpenVMS Use DISPLAY USAGE to display information about the current state of a page set Synonym DIS USAGE DISPLAY USAGE gt gt DISPLAY USAGE Notes r CMDSCOPE 7 PSID gt lt 1 PSID integer I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 L CMDSCOPE 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE Parameter descriptions This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name PSID integer The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group The page set identifier that a storage class maps to This is optional This is a number in the range 00 thr
140. TE SHARED FIXSHARED In conjunction with the various values of the CMDSCOPE parameter this parameter controls two types of channel SHARED A receiving channel is shared if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue sharing group A sending channel is shared if its transmission queue has a disposition of SHARED PRIVATE A receiving channel is private if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue manager A sending channel is private if its transmission queue has a disposition other than SHARED Note This disposition is not related to the disposition set by the disposition of the queue sharing group of the channel definition The combination of the CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE parameters also controls from which queue manager the channel is operated The possible options are On the local queue manager where the command is issued Chapter 2 The commands 255 START CHANNEL On another specific named queue manager in the group On every active queue manager in the group On the most suitable queue manager in the group determined automatically by the queue manager itself The various combinations of CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE are summarized in Table 9 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for START CHANNEL CHLDISP CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE qmgr name CMDSCOPE CMDSCOPE local qmgr PRIVATE Start as a private channel on Start as a privat
141. TE STGCLASS DELETE STGCLASS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DELETE STGCLASS to delete a storage class definition Synonym DELETE 5 DELETE STGCLASS r CMDSCOPE QSGDISP DELETE STGCLASS name gt lt 1 QSGDISP COPY I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 1 QSGDISP GROUP Notes 1 CMDSCOPE Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions You must specify which storage class definition you want to delete queues that use the storage class must be empty and closed name name of the storage class definition to be deleted The name must be defined to the local queue manager The command fails unless all queues referencing the storage class are empty and closed CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if OSGDISP is set to GROUP 4r entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered
142. TER SECURITY CMDSCOPE 7 gt gt ALTER SECURITY gt lt security attrs H CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE Security attrs mNrERVAL integer l rmeoUT integer Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions The parameters you specify override the current parameter values Attributes that you do not specify are unchanged Note If you do not specify any parameters the command completes successfully but no security options are changed CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 4 The command is executed the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled 46 MOSC Command Reference ALTER SECURITY i The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the comm
143. TER clustername The name of the cluster to which the queue belongs This parameter is supported only on alias local and remote queues The maximum length is 48 characters conforming to the rules for naming MOGeries objects Changes to this parameter do not affect instances of the queue that are already open Only one of the resultant values of CLUSNL or CLUSTER can be nonblank you cannot specify a value for both On local queues this parameter cannot be set for transmission SYSTEM CHANNEL xx SYSTEM CLUSTER xx or SYSTEM COMMAND xx queues and on OS 390 only for SYSTEM OSG xx queues This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if QSGDISP is set to GROUP or SHARED 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to
144. TPUT parameter Whether handle is providing browse access BROWSE parameter Whether handle is providing inquire access INQUIRE parameter Whether handle is providing set access SET parameter The following parameters be specified for TYPE HANDLE to request additional information for each queue If a parameter that is not relevant is specified for the queue operating environment or type of status information requested that parameter is ignored APPLTAG A string containing the tag of the application connected to the queue manager It is one of the following MVS batch job name TSO USERID CICS APPLID MS region name Channel initiator job name APPLTYPE A string indicating the type of the application that is connected to the queue manager It is one of the following BATCH OS 390 batch program not running under RRS RRSBATCH 5 390 batch program running under RRS CICS CICS transaction IMS IMS transaction CHINIT Channel initiator SYSTEM Queue manager ASID A 4 character address space identifier of the application identified by APPLTAG It distinguishes duplicate values of APPLTAG This parameter is returned only when the queue manager owning the queue is running on OS 390 and the APPLTYPE parameter does not have the value SYSTEM BROWSE Indicates whether the handle is providing browse access to the queue The value is one of the following YES handle is providing browse access NO The handle
145. The queues must all be defined to the local queue manager or queue sharing group ALL Display all of the status information for each specified queue This is the default if you do not specify a generic name and do not request any specific parameters CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group di The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled command is executed on the local queue manager is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group OPENTYPE Restricts the queues selected to those that have handles with the specified type of access ALL Selects queues that are open with any type of access This is the default if the OPENTYPE parameter is not specified INPUT Selects queues that are open for input only This option does not select queues that are open for browse OUTPUT Selects queues that are open only for output The OPENTYPE
146. UE QDPLOEV Whether Queue Depth Low events are generated QDPMAXEV Whether Queue Full events are generated QMID The internally generated unique name of the queue manager that hosts the queue OSVCIEV Whether service interval events are generated OSVCINT Service interval event generation threshold Queue type On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT the queue type is always displayed if you specify a generic queue name and do not request any other parameters On OS 390 the queue type is always displayed On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT TYPE type can be used as a synonym for this parameter RETINTVL Retention interval RNAME Name of the local queue as known by the remote queue manager ROMNAME Remote queue manager name SCOPE Scope of queue definition not supported on OS 390 or OS 400 SHARE Whether the queue can be shared STGCLASS Storage class TARGO Local name of aliased queue TRIGDATA Trigger data TRIGDPTH Trigger depth TRIGGER Whether triggers are active TRIGMPRI Threshold message priority for triggers TRIGTYPE Trigger type USAGE Whether or not the queue is a transmission queue Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 211 DISPLAY QUEUE XMITO Transmission queue name 212 MQsSeries MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY SECURITY DISPLAY SECURITY Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX syste
147. VMS Valid only for clients to be run on DOS OS 2 Warp Windows and Windows NT Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 23 ALTER CHANNEL Cluster sender channel ALTER CHANNEL 1 3 gt gt ALTER CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE CLUSSDR 1 BATCHINT integer gt gaTCHSZ integer L cuusTER clustername cLUsNL n1name r CMDSCOPE 2 gt 10 string Lcowverr 0 J I CMDSCOPE qmgr name YES 10 CMDSCOPE gt pescR string DISCINT integer BINT integer LLoNGRTY integer gt LONGTMR integer MAXMSGL integer MCANAME string gt 4 wcauser string MCATYPE PROCESS THREAD gt 5 MODENAME string 6 MSGDATA s tring gt L_NPMS PEED FAST p NORMAL 6 MSGEXIT string r QSGDISP QMGR 2 gt 5 7 QSGDISP COPY PASSWORD string 10 I QSGDISP GROUP QSGDISP PRIVATE 6 6 RCVDATA CI string RCVEXIT string 24 MOSC Command Reference ALTER CHANNEL scypata string scveXtT string 1
148. VPARM jcl substitution Notes 1 is accepted as a synonym for ENVPARM gt lt Parameter descriptions These are optional EN VPARM jcl substitution The parameters and values to be substituted in the JCL procedure xxxxMSTR where xxxx is the queue manager name that is used to start the queue manager address space jcl substitution One or more character strings of the form keyword value enclosed in single quotation marks If you use more than one character string separate the strings by commas and enclose the entire list in single quotation marks for example ENVPARM HLO CSQ VER 520 MSTR is accepted as a synonym for ENVPARM PARM member name The load module that contains the queue manager initialization parameters member name is the name of a load module provided by the installation The default is CSQZPARM which is provided by MOSeries 264 MOSC Command Reference START TRACE START TRACE Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use START to start traces When you issue this command a trace number is returned in message number CSQW130I You can use this trace number TNO in ALTER TRACE DISPLAY TRACE and STOP TRACE commands Synonym STA TRACE CMDSCOPE START TRACE GLOBAL START TRACE ACCTG STAT CMDSCOPE qmgr name
149. VR or SVRCONN MRDATA string Channel message retry exit user data maximum length 32 characters This is passed to the channel message retry exit when it is called This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of RCVR ROSTR or CLUSRCVR It is not supported on OS 390 MREXIT string Channel message retry exit name The format and maximum length of the name is the same as for MSGEXIT This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of RCVR ROSTR or CLUSRCVR It is not supported on OS 390 MRRTY integer The number of times the channel will retry before it decides it cannot deliver the message This parameter controls the action of the MCA only if the message retry exit name is blank If the exit name is not blank the value of MRRTY is passed to the exit for the exit s use but the number of retries performed if any is controlled by the exit and not by this parameter The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 A value of zero means that no retries will be performed 84 MQSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of RCVR ROSTR or CLUSRCVR It is not supported on OS 390 MRTMR integer The minimum interval of time that must pass before the channel can retry the MOPUT operation This time interval is in milliseconds This parameter con
150. Y CLUSOMGR 173 SCYEXIT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 89 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 security alter parameters 46 display parameters 213 rebuild 234 refresh 234 reverify 251 SENDDATA parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 90 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 SENDEXIT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 90 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 SENDSEQ parameter RESET TPIPE 244 SEQNUM parameter RESET CHANNEL 238 sequence numbers resetting on an IMS Tpipe 243 SEQWRAP parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 90 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 SET LOG command 252 SET parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 198 SHARE parameter DEFINE queues 128 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 SHARED parameter MOVE QLOCAL 226 STOP CHINIT 275 SHORT parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 162 SHORTRTS parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 166 SHORTRTY parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 90 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 SHORTTMR parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 91 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 softcopy books 304 START CHANNEL command 254 START CHINIT command 258 START CMDSERV command 260 START LISTENER command 261 START OMGR command 264 START TRACE command 265 STATUS parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 164 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 171 STGCLASS parameter DEFINE queues 128 DISPLAY QUEUE 206 211 STOP CHANNEL command 270 STOP CHINIT command 274 STOP CMDSERV command 276 STOP LISTENER command 277 STOP OMGR command 279 STOP TRACE command 281 STOPREO parame
151. YSTEM DEFAULT ALIAS QUEUE Default alias queue definition SYSTEM DEFAULT INITIATION QUEUE Queue used to trigger a specified process not for OS 390 SYSTEM DEFAULT LOCAL QUEUE SYSTEM DEFAULT MODEL QUEUE Default local queue definition Default model queue definition SYSTEM DEFAULT REMOTE QUEUE Default remote queue definition SYSTEM MOSC REPLY QUEUE Model queue definition for MOSC command replies not for OS 390 SYSTEM QSG CHANNEL SYNCOQ Shared local queue used for storing messages that contain the synchronization information for shared channels OS 390 only SYSTEM QSG TRANSMIT QUEUE Shared local queue used by the intra group queuing agent when transmitting messages between queue managers in the same queue sharing group OS 390 only Chapter 1 Using MQSeries commands 5 Rules for naming objects Other object names Processes namelists and clusters can have names up to 48 bytes long Channels can have names up to 20 bytes long Storage classes can have names up to 8 bytes long Reserved object names Names that start with SYSTEM are reserved for objects defined by the queue manager You can use the ALTER or DEFINE REPLACE commands to change these object definitions to suit your installation The following names are defined for MOSeries SYSTEM ADMIN SVRCONN Server connection channel used for remote administration of a queue manager by the MOSeries Explorer remote a
152. a particular type or types Attributes that are not relevant for a particular type of channel cause no output and do not cause an error CLUSDATE The date on which the definition became available to the local queue manager in the form yyyy mm dd CLUSTIME The time at which the definition became available to the local queue manager in the form hh mm ss DEFTYPE How the cluster queue manager was defined CLUSSDR As a cluster sender channel from an explicit definition CLUSSDRA As a cluster sender channel by auto definition alone CLUSSDRB As a cluster sender channel by auto definition and an explicit definition 170 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY CLUSQMGR CLUSRCVR As a cluster receiver channel from an explicit definition The function of the queue manager in the cluster REPOS Provides a full repository service NORMAL Does not provide a full repository service QMID The internally generated unique name of the queue manager STATUS The current status of the channel for this queue manager This is one of the following STARTING A request has been made to start the channel but the channel has not yet begun processing A channel is in this state if it is waiting to become active BINDING The channel is performing channel negotiation and is not yet ready to transfer messages INACTIVE The channel is not active INITIALIZING The channel initiator is attempting to start a channel On OS 390
153. active queue managers in the queue sharing group to cause them to refresh local copies on page set 0 DEFINE QUEUE name REPLACE QSGDISP COPY PRIVATE The object resides on the page set of the Not permitted queue manager that executes the command and was defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository is unaffected QMGR The object definition resides on the page set The object is defined on the page set of the of the queue manager that executes the queue manager that executes the command command The object was defined using a This is the default value For local queues command that had the parameters messages are stored on the page sets of each QSGDISP QMGR Any object residing in the queue manager and are available only shared repository any local copy of such through that queue manager an object is not affected by this command This is the default value SHARED This value applies only to local queues The This option applies only to local queues The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a command that had the parameters OSGDISP SHARED Any object residing on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command or any object defined using a command that had the parameters OSGDISP GROUD is not affected by this command If the queue is clustered a command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the queue shari
154. ager alias or a reply to queue alias Synonym ALT OR ALTER QREMOTE CMDSCOPE 7 3 QSGDISP QMGR 3 gt gt ALTER QREMOTE q name zi gt FORCE 4 I QSGDISP COPY I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 4 4 I QSGDISP GROUP L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP PRIVATE gt lt il common q attrs remote q attrs H Common q attrs ENABLED perPRTY integer Loerpsist No j DESCR string PUT L YES Remote q attrs 1 1 1 L CLUSTER clustername L CLUSNL n1 name DEFBIND OPEN otrrxep L string string 2 Lxwrro string SCOPE QMGR L CELL Notes 1 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 2 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp UNIX systems and Windows NT 3 Valid only on OS 390 4 only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions For a description of the parameters see LTD Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 45 ALTER SECURITY ALTER SECURITY Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use ALTER SECURITY to define system wide security options Synonym ALT SEC AL
155. ager fails so they can contain persistent messages Contrast with temporary dynamic queue persistent message A message that survives a restart of the queue manager Contrast with nonpersistent message ping In distributed queuing a diagnostic aid that uses the exchange of a test message to confirm that a message channel or a TCP IP connection is functioning platform In MOSeries the operating system under which a queue manager is running Glossary of terms and abbreviations 297 Glossary point of recovery In MOSeries for OS 390 the term used to describe a set of backup copies of MOSeries for OS 390 page sets and the corresponding log data sets required to recover these page sets These backup copies provide a potential restart point in the event of page set loss for example page set I O error preemptive shutdown In a shutdown of a queue manager that does not wait for connected applications to disconnect nor for current MOI calls to complete Contrast with immediate shutdown and quiesced shutdown principal In MOSeries on UNIX systems MOSeries for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT a term used for a user identifier Used by the object authority manager for checking authorizations to system resources privately defined object In OS 390 an object whose definition is stored on page set zero The definition can be accessed only by the queue manager that defined it Also known as a locally de
156. agrams sometimes referred to as railroad diagrams Each syntax diagram begins with a double right arrow and ends with a right and left arrow pair Lines beginning with a single right arrow are continuation lines You read a syntax diagram from left to right and from top to bottom following the direction of the arrows Other conventions used in syntax diagrams are Table 1 How to read syntax diagrams Convention Meaning You must specify values A B and C Required values are shown on A B C 4 main line of a syntax diagram You may specify value A Optional values are shown below the main PELIS line of a syntax diagram Values and are alternatives one of which you must specify Values B and are alternatives one of which you may specify You may specify one or more of the values A B and C Any required p gt LL separator for multiple or repeated values in this example the comma is shown on the arrow gt lt Chapter 1 Using commands 7 Syntax diagrams Table 1 How to read syntax diagrams continued Convention Meaning La AA Name L LJ You may specify value A multiple times The separator in this example is optional Values B and are alternatives one of which you m
157. all default IFCID classes COMMENT string A comment that is reproduced in the trace output record except in the resident trace tables string is any character string If it includes blanks commas or special characters it must be enclosed between single quotation marks 7 IFCID fcid The events to be traced This specifies the optional IFCIDs to activate AII IFCIDs and classes specified are activated for the trace type specified 50 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference ARCHIVE LOG ARCHIVE LOG Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use ARCHIVE LOG as part of your backup procedure It takes copy of the current active log following the latest syncpoint Synonym ARC LOG ARCHIVE LOG ARCHIVE LOG gt WAIT NUS MODE QUIESCE nnn L wart ves CANCEL OFFLOAD CMDSCOPE gt 4 1 CMDSCOPE qmgr name Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions The ARCHIVE LOG command takes a copy of the active log or both logs if you are using dual logging the parameters are optional CANCEL OFFLOAD Cancels any off loading currently in progress and restarts the off load process The process starts with the oldest active log data set and proceeds through all the active data sets that need off loading You are r
158. anager Cluster commands were added to reflect queue manager cluster processing DISPLAY CLUSQMGR DISPLAY QCLUSTER REFRESH CLUSTER RESET CLUSTER The following Queue Manager commands were changed to reflect queue manager cluster processing ALTER DISPLAY OMGR RESUME QMGR STOP OMGR SUSPEND The following Namelist commands were changed to reflect queue manager cluster processing ALTER NAMELIST DEFINE NAMELIST DELETE NAMELIST DISPLAY NAMELIST Changes were also made to the following commands ALTER CHANNEL ALTER PROCESS ALTER QALIAS ALTER QLOCAL ALTER OMODEL ALTER OREMOTE DEFINE CHANNEL DEFINE PROCESS DEFINE QALIAS DEFINE QLOCAL DEFINE OMODEL X MOSeries MQSC Command Reference DEFINE OREMOTE DELETE CHANNEL DISPLAY CHANNEL DISPLAY CHSTATUS DISPLAY QUEUE DISPLAY PROCESS DISPLAY STGCLASS DISPLAY THREAD DISPLAY USAGE PING CHANNEL REFRESH SECURITY RESET CHANNEL RESOLVE CHANNEL RESOLVE INDOUBT START CHANNEL START CHINIT START LISTENER STOP CHANNEL STOP CHINIT Changes Summary of changes xi Changes xii MQSC Command Reference Chapter 1 Using MQSeries commands MOSeries commands MQSC provide a uniform method of issuing human readable commands on platforms For information about programmable command format PCF commands not available on OS 390 see the The generat format
159. anager is not started if one of the following is true TRACE STAT or TRACE ACCTO is specified The list of destinations does not include RES This list of classes does not include 01 or 04 Also comments will be truncated to 120 characters If tracing for RMID 231 is started it stops if the channel initiator is stopped Table 13 Resource Manager identifiers that are allowed RMID Resource manager Initialization procedures Agent services management Recovery management Recovery log management Storage management Subsystem support for allied memories OI NID SP 9 Subsystem support for subsystem interface SSI functions 12 System parameter management 16 Instrumentation commands trace and dump services 23 General command processing 24 Message generator 268 MQSC Command Reference START TRACE Table 13 Resource Manager identifiers that are allowed continued RMID Resource manager 26 Instrumentation accounting and statistics 148 Connection manager 197 CF manager 199 Functional recovery 200 Security management 201 Data management 211 Lock management 212 Message management 213 Command server 215 Buffer management 231 Channel Initiator 242 MOGSeries IMS bridge 245 DB2 manager TDATA Reserved for IBM service USERID Introduces a list of specific user IDs for whic
160. anager or queue sharing group The performance data is returned in the same format as parameters returned by DISPLAY commands The data is OSTATS The name of the queue QSGDISP The disposition of the queue that is OMGR COPY or SHARED RESETINT The number of seconds since the statistics were last reset HIODEPTH The peak queue depth since the statistics were last reset MSGSIN The number of messages that have been added to the queue by MOPUT and MQPUTI calls since the statistics were last reset The count includes messages added to the queue in units of work that have not yet been committed but the count is not decremented if the units of work are subsequently backed out Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 241 RESET QSTATS MSGSOUT The number of messages removed from the queue by destructive non browse MOGET calls since the statistics were last reset The count includes messages removed from the queue in units of work that have not yet been committed but the count is not decremented if the units of work are subsequently backed out CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a q
161. and a subsequent get is compared by the queue manager in deciding whether the conditions for a service interval event have been met The service interval for a queue is specified by a queue attribute service interval event An event related to the service interval session ID In MOSeries for OS 390 the CICS unique identifier that defines the communication link to be used by a message channel agent when moving messages from a transmission queue to a link shared inbound channel In MQSeries for OS 390 a channel that was started by a listener using the group port The channel definition of a shared channel can be stored either on page set zero private or in the shared repository global shared outbound channel In MQSeries for OS 390 channel that moves messages from a shared transmission queue The channel definition of a shared channel can be stored either on page set zero private or in the shared repository global shared queue In MQSeries for OS 390 a type of local queue The messages on the queue are stored in the coupling facility and can be accessed by one or more queue managers in a queue sharing eroup The definition of the queue is stored in the shared repository shared repository In MOSeries for OS 390 a shared DB2 database that is used to hold object definitions that have been defined globally shutdown See immediate shutdown preemptive shutdown and quiesced shutdown 300 MOSC C
162. and is generated and sent to all active executes the command except a local copy queue managers in the queue sharing group of the object is not affected by this to cause them to make or refresh local copies command If the command is successful the on page set 0 following command is generated and sent to DEFINE NAMELIST name all active queue managers in the REPLACE QSGDISP COPY queue sharing group to cause them to refresh local copies on page set 0 DEFINE NAMELIST name REPLACE QSGDISP COPY PRIVATE The object resides on the page set of the Not permitted queue manager that executes the command and was defined with OSGDISP OMGR or OSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository is unaffected Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 97 DEFINE NAMELIST OSGDISP ALTER DEFINE OMGR The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters OSGDISP OMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value The object is defined on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command This is the default value REPLACE and NOREPLACE Whether the existing definition and on OS 390 with the same disposition is to be replaced with this one This is optional The default is NOREPLACE
163. and on every queue manager in the queue sharing group INTERVA L integer The interval between checks for user IDs for which the TIMEOUT has expired The value is in minutes the range 0 10080 one week If INTERVAL is specified as 0 no user timeouts occur TIMEOUT integer How long an unused user ID can remain in the MQSeries subsystem The value specifies a number of minutes in the range 0 10080 one week If TIMEOUT is specified as 0 and INTERVAL is nonzero then all users are signed off within the queue manager every INTERVAL number of minutes The length of time that an unused user ID can remain depends on the value of INTERVAL The user ID times out at a time between TIMEOUT and TIMEOUT plus INTERVAL When the TIMEOUT and INTERVAL parameters are changed the previous timer request is canceled and a new timer request is scheduled immediately using the new TIMEOUT value When the timer request is actioned a new value for INTERVAL is set Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 47 ALTER STGCLASS ALTER STGCLASS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use ALTER STGCLASS to alter the characteristics of a storage class Synonym ALT STC ALTER STGCLASS gt gt ALTER STGCLASS storage class Psi integer CMDSCOPE 7 pescR description gt FGNAME mA FMNAME anane r QSGDISP QMGR
164. and that had the parameters OSGDISP OMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value queue manager that executes the command This is the default value RCVDATA string Channel receive exit user data maximum length 32 characters This is passed to the channel receive exit when it is called On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can specify data for more than one exit program by specifying multiple strings separated by commas The total length of the field must not exceed 999 characters On OS 400 you can specify up to 10 strings each of length 32 characters The first string of data is passed to the first receive exit specified the second string to the second exit and so on On other platforms you can specify only one string of receive exit data for each channel 88 MOSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL RCVEXIT string Channel receive exit name On platforms other than Tandem NSK if this name is nonblank the exit is called at the following times Immediately before the received network data is processed The exit is given the complete transmission buffer as received The contents of the buffer can be modified as required At initialization and termination of the channel On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can specify the name o
165. annel instances The information applies to all channel types except where stated BATCHES Number of completed batches during this session since the channel was started BATCHSZ The batch size being used for this session valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT This parameter does not apply to server connection channels and no values are returned if specified on the command this is ignored BUFSRCVD Number of transmission buffers received This includes transmissions to receive control information only BUFSSENT Number of transmission buffers sent This includes transmissions to send control information only BYTSRCVD Number of bytes received during this session since the channel was started This includes control information received by the message channel agent BYTSSENT Number of bytes sent during this session since the channel was started This includes control information sent by the message channel agent CHSTADA Date when this channel was started in the form yyyy mm dd CHSTATI Time when this channel was started in the form hh mm ss JOBNAME Name of job currently serving the channel On Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS this is the process identifier displayed in hexadecimal On OS 2 Warp OS 400 UNIX systems and Windows NT this is the concatenation of the process identifier and the thread identifier of the MCA program displayed in hexadecimal On Tande
166. annel is private if its transmission queue has a disposition other than SHARED Note This disposition is not related to the disposition set by the disposition of the queue sharing group of the channel definition The combination of the CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE parameters also controls from which queue manager the channel is operated The possible options are On the local queue manager where the command is issued Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 229 PING CHANNEL On another specific named queue manager in the group On the most suitable queue manager in the group determined automatically by the queue manager itself The various combinations of CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE are summarized in Table 6 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for PING CHANNEL CHLDISP CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE qmgr name CMDSCOPE CMDSCOPE local qmgr PRIVATE Ping private channel on the Ping private channel on the Ping private channel on all local queue manager Ping a shared channel on the most suitable queue manager in the group This might automatically generate a command using CMDSCOPE and send it to the appropriate queue manager If there is no definition for the channel on the queue manager to which the command is sent or if the definition is unsuitable for the command the command will fail The definition of a channel on the queue manager where the command is entered might be used to determine the target queue manager where the com
167. annel user exit is not invoked If any of these parameters is nonblank the channel exit program is called You can enter text string for these parameters The maximum length of the string is 128 characters This string is passed to the exit program but it is not used to determine the program name See the MOQSeries for Tandem NonStop Kernel System Management Guidd for more information about using channel exit programs on Tandem NSK On other platforms if this name is nonblank the exit is called at the following times Immediately after a message has been retrieved from the transmission queue sender or server or immediately before a message is put to a destination queue receiver or requester The exit is given the entire application message and transmission queue header for modification At initialization and termination of the channel Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 85 DEFINE CHANNEL On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can specify the name of more than one exit program by specifying multiple strings separated by commas However the total number of characters specified must not exceed 999 On OS 400 you can specify the names of up to 10 exit programs by specifying multiple strings separated by commas On other platforms you can specify only one message exit name for each channel For channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of CLNTCONN or SVRCONN this parameter is not relevant because mes
168. arameter START CHINIT 259 START 264 ENVRDATA parameter DEFINE PROCESS 102 DISPLAY PROCESS 186 F FIFO queue DEFINE queues 122 FORCE parameter ALTER 31 queues 118 G GET parameter DEFINE queues 119 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 glossary 291 group display 177 H HARDENBO parameter DEFINE queues 119 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 HBINT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 81 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSQMGR 172 HTML Hypertext Markup Language 304 Hypertext Markup Language HTML 304 IFCID parameter ALTER TRACE 50 START TRACE 268 IGQ parameter ALTER QMGR 35 DISPLAY QMGR 191 IGQAUT parameter ALTER 35 36 DISPLAY OMGR 191 IGQUSER parameter DISPLAY OMGR 191 IMS Tpipe reset sequence numbers manually 243 in doubt thread display 218 resolve manually 248 INDISP parameter START LISTENER 262 STOP LISTENER 278 INDOUBT parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 163 INDXTYPE parameter DEFINE queues 119 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 INHIBTEV parameter ALTER 36 DISPLAY 191 INITO parameter DEFINE queues 120 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 START CHINIT 259 INPUT parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 198 INQUIRE parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 198 INTERVAL parameter ALTER SECURITY 47 DISPLAY SECURITY 214 IPADDR parameter START LISTENER 262 STOP LISTENER 278 IPPROCS parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 196 IPPROCS parameter DISPLAY QUEUE 210 J JOBNAME parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 165 L LIKE option DEFINE CHANNEL 81 DEFINE NAMELIST 96 DEFINE
169. are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual b The command server and the channel initiator must be running 2 Where there is both a locally defined channel and an auto defined cluster sender channel of the same name the command applies to the locally defined channel If there is no locally defined channel but more than one auto defined cluster sender channel the command applies to the channel that was last added to the local queue manager s repository This command can be used only for sender SDR server SVR and cluster sender CLUSSDR channels including those that have been defined automatically It is not valid if the channel is running however it is valid if the channel is stopped or in retry mode Synonym PING CHL PING CHANNEL FCMDSCOPE ___ 1 PING CHANNEL channel name 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 CMDSCOPE CHLDISP PRIVATE 1 DATALEN 16 gt lt 2 _DATALEN integer L CHLDISP SHARED 2 CHLDISP FIXSHARED Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 228 MOSC Command Reference PING CHANNEL Parameter descriptions channel name The name of the channel to be tested This is required CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS
170. atching units of work will be either committed or backed out according to the ACTION specified Only the shared portion of the unit of work will be resolved by this command As the queue manager is necessarily inactive local messages are unaffected and remain locked until the queue manager restarts or after restarting connects with the transaction manager Examples RESOLVE INDOUBT CICSA ACTION COMMIT NID CICSA ABCDEF0123456789 RESOLVE INDOUBT CICSA ACTION BACKOUT NID Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 249 RESUME QMGR RESUME QMGR Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use RESUME OMGR to inform other queue mangers in a cluster that the local queue manager is available again for processing and can be sent messages It reverses the action of the SUSPEND OMGR command Notes 1 On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris 2 On OS 390 the command fails if the channel initiator has not been started Synonym None RESUME QMGR r CMDSCOPE 7 RESUME LUSTER clustername CLUSNL n name 2 CMDSCOPE qmgr name Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions CLUSTER clustername The name of the c
171. ay specify If you specify none of the values shown the default A the value shown above the main line is used The syntax fragment Name is shown separately from the main syntax diagram Punctuation and uppercase values Specify exactly as shown Lowercase values for example name Supply your own text in place of the name variable 8 MQSC Command Reference Chapter 2 MQSeries commands This chapter describes in alphabetic order all the MQSeries commands that can be issued by operators and administrators Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 ALTER CHANNEL ALTER CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use ALTER CHANNEL to alter the parameters of a channel Notes 1 On OS 390 this is valid only for channels used for distributed queuing without CICS If you are using CICS for distributed queuing the equivalent function is available using the CKMC transaction See the Moseid manual 2 For cluster sender channels you can only alter channels that have been created manually Synonym ALT CHL 10 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference ALTER CHANNEL Sender channel ALTER CHANNEL 1 gt gt ALTER CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE SDR 3 BATCHINT integer r CMDSCOPE 2 gt gt
172. basic mapping support BMS An interface between CICS and application programs that formats input and output display data and routes multiple page output messages without regard for control characters used by various terminals BMS Basic mapping support bootstrap data set BSDS A VSAM data set that contains An inventory of all active and archived log data sets known to MQSeries for OS 390 wrap around inventory of all recent MOSeries for OS 390 activity The BSDS is required if the MOSeries for OS 390 subsystem has to be restarted browse In message queuing to use the MOGET call to copy a message without removing it from the queue See also get browse cursor In message queuing an indicator used when browsing a queue to identify the message that is next in sequence BSDS Bootstrap data set buffer pool An area of main storage used for for OS 390 queues messages and object definitions See also page set C call back In MOSeries a requester message channel initiates a transfer from a sender channel by first calling the sender then closing down and awaiting a call back Channel control function CCSID Coded character set identifier Channel definition file channel See message channel channel control function CCF In MQSeries program to move messages from a transmission queue to a communication link and from a communication link to a local queue together
173. book to learn their syntax The syntax of the MOSeries commands is represented in syntax diagrams To learn how to read these diagrams see parameters for each command are listed the following erder in the syntax diagrams e Parameters that are required are listed first in alphabetic order e Parameters that are optional follow again in alphabetic order There is a glossary at the back of the book viii MQSC Command Reference Summary of changes This section describes changes in this edition of MQSeries MQSC Command Reference Changes since the previous edition of the book are marked by vertical lines to the left of the changes Changes for this edition SC33 1369 13 The name of the book for this edition has been changed to MQSC Command Reference The text for the ALTER and DEFINE object commands has been merged e This edition includes the following new product release for OS 390 V5 2 The following commands have been added for this release CLEAR QLOCAL supported on OS 390 DISPLAY LOG DISPLAY OSTATUS MOVE QLOCAL RESET OSTATS SET LOG e Queue sharing groups have been added to for OS 390 V5 2 and the following command has been added to support this feature DISPLAY GROUP Various parameters have been added to the commands in support of queue sharing groups The principal parameters are CMDSCOPE This parameter has bee
174. butes that you do not specify are unchanged Notes 1 If you do not specify any parameters the command completes successfully but no queue manager options are changed 2 Changes made using this command persist when the queue manager is stopped and restarted FORCE Specify this to force completion of the command if both of the following are true The DEFXMITO parameter is specified application has a remote queue open the resolution for which would be affected by this change If FORCE is not specified in these circumstances the command is unsu ccessful Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 31 ALTER QMGR Queue manager parameters AUTHOREV Whether authorization Not Authorized events are generated ENABLED Authorization events are generated This value is not supported on OS 390 DISABLED Authorization events are not generated This is the queue manager s initial default value CCSID integer CHAD The coded character set identifier for the queue manager The CCSID is the identifier used with all character string fields defined by the API It does not apply to application data carried in the text of messages unless the CCSID in the message descriptor is set to the value MOCCSI O MGR when the message is put to a queue Specify a value in the range 1 through 65 535 The CCSID must specify a value that is defined for use on your platform and use a character set that is appropriate to the platfor
175. c name and do not request any specific parameters 152 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY CHANNEL If no parameters are specified and the ALL parameter is not specified or defaulted the default is that the channel names only are displayed On OS 390 the CHLTYPE is also displayed CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if QSGDISP is set to GROUP 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name QSGDISP The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Specifies the disposition of the objects for which information is to be displayed Values are LIVE ALL This is the default value and displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY Displays infor
176. ced if one exists are ignored The command fails if both of the following are true The command sets parameters that would require the use of the FORCE option if you were using the ALTER command The object is open The ALTER command with the FORCE option succeeds in this situation 126 Command Reference Define queues If SCOPE CELL is specified on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS UNIX systems OS 2 Warp or Windows NT and there is already a queue with the same name in the cell directory the command fails whether or not REPLACE is specified RETINTVL integer The number of hours greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 from the queue creation date and time the date and time at which the queue was defined after which the queue is no longer needed This parameter is supported only on local and model queues The CRDATE and CRTIME can be displayed using the DISPLAY QUEUE command This information is available for use by an operator or a housekeeping application to delete queues that are no longer required Note The queue manager does not delete queues based on this value nor does it prevent queues from being deleted if their retention interval has not expired It is the user s responsibility to take any required action RNAME string Name of remote queue This is the local name of the queue as defined on the queue manager specified by This para
177. channel belongs The maximum length is 48 characters conforming to the rules for naming MOSeries objects This parameter is valid only for CLUSSDR and CLUSRCVR channels Only one of the resultant values of CLUSTER or CLUSNL can be nonblank the other must be blank This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLUSNL nlname The name of the namelist that specifies a list of clusters to which the channel belongs This parameter is valid only for CLUSSDR and CLUSRCVR channels Only one of the resultant values of CLUSTER or CLUSNL can be nonblank the other must be blank This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Chapter 2 The commands 77 DEFINE CHANNEL CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if OSGDISP is set to GROUP ax The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which it was entered only if you are using a shared queue environment and if the command server is enabled
178. channels that will connect to servers on the platforms supporting SPX TCP Transmission Control Protocol part of the TCP IP protocol suite UDP User Datagram Protocol part of the TCP IP protocol suite supported only on AIX this option is available only for connection to MOSeries for Windows V2 0 with CSD02 USERID string Task user identifier maximum length 12 characters This is used by the message channel agent when attempting to initiate a secure LU 6 2 session with a remote message channel agent This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR RQSTR CLNTCONN or CLUSSDR On OS 390 it is supported only for CLNTCONN channels Although the maximum length of the parameter is 12 characters only the first 10 characters are used XMITO string Transmission queue name The name of the queue from which messages are retrieved See This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR or SVR For these channel types this parameter is required 92 MQSC Command Reference DEFINE MAXSMSGS DEFINE MAXSMSGS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DEFINE MAXSMSGS to define the maximum number of messages that a task can get or put within a single unit of recovery Notes You can issue the DEFINE MAXSMSGS command at any time to change the number of
179. cified or if there is a shared queue manager environment The object was defined with QSGDISP QMGR GROUP The object was defined with OSGDISP GROUP COPY The object was defined with QSGDISP COPY ALL Specify this to cause all parameters to be displayed If this parameter is specified any parameters that are also requested specifically have no effect all parameters are still displayed This is the default if you do not specify a generic name and do not request any specific parameters Requested parameters Specify one or more parameters that define the data to be displayed The parameters can be specified in any order but do not specify the same parameter more than once The default if no parameters are specified and the ALL parameter is not specified is the storage class names and their page set identifiers are displayed ALTDATE The date on which the definition was last altered in the form yyyy mm dd ALTTIME The time at which the definition was last altered in the form hh mm ss DESCR Descriptive comment XCFGNAME The name of the XCF group that is a member of XCFMNAME The XCF member name of the IMS system within the XCF group specified in XCFGNAME Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 217 DISPLAY THREAD DISPLAY THREAD Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DISPLAY THREAD to display informatio
180. cified by the QUIESCE parameter of the CSOGARVP macro nnn is the time in seconds in the range 001 through 999 To specify the TIME parameter you must also specify MODE QUIESCE If you specify the TIME parameter you must specify an appropriate period of time for the quiesce period If you make the period too short or too long one of the following problems might occur The quiesce might not be complete e MOSeries lock contention might develop A timeout might interrupt the quiesce Specifies whether MOSeries is to wait until the quiesce process has finished before returning to the issuer of the ARCHIVE LOG command or not To specify the WAIT parameter you must also specify MODE QUIESCE NO Specifies that control is returned to the issuer when the quiesce process starts This makes the quiesce process asynchronous to the issuer you can issue further MQSeries commands when the ARCHIVE LOG command returns control to you This is the default YES Specifies that control is returned to the issuer when the quiesce process finishes This makes the quiesce process synchronous to the issuer further commands are not processed until the ARCHIVE LOG command finishes Usage notes 1 You cannot issue an ARCHIVE LOG command while a previous ARCHIVE LOG command is in progress 2 You cannot issue an ARCHIVE LOG command when the active log data set is the last available active log data set because it would use all th
181. cified in dotted decimal or alphanumeric form This is valid only if the transmission protocol TRPTYPE is TCP IP 262 MQSC Command Reference START LISTENER LUNAME string The symbolic destination name for the logical unit as specified in the APPC side information data set This LU must be the same LU that is specified in the channel initiator parameters to be used for outbound transmissions This parameter is valid only for channels with a transmission protocol TRPTYPE of LU 6 2 ASTART LISTENER command which specifies TRPTYPE LU62 must also specify the LUNAME parameter This parameter is supported only on OS 390 PORT port number Port number for TCP This is valid only if the transmission protocol TRPTYPE is TCP This parameter is supported only on OS 390 TRPTYPE Transport type to be used This is optional TCP TCP This is the default if TRPTYPE is not specified LU62 SNA LU 62 This parameter is supported only on OS 390 Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 263 START QMGR START QMGR Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use START OMGR to initialize the queue manager When the operation has been completed the queue manager is active and available to CICS IMS batch and TSO applications Synonym STA OMGR START QMGR PARM CSQZPARM START QMGR 1 PARM member name EN
182. cluster receiver channels This can be followed by an optional port number enclosed in parentheses On OS 390 the connection name can include the IP name of an OS 390 dynamic DNS group or a network dispatcher input port Note You are not recommended to include this for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR UDP Either the host name or the network address of the remote MOGeries for Windows V2 0 machine This can be followed by an optional port number enclosed in parentheses This parameter is required for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR ROSTR CLNTCONN CLUSSDR and CLUSRCVR It is optional for SVR channels and is not valid for RCVR or SVRCONN channels Note If you are using any of the special characters in your connection name for example parentheses you must enclose the string in single quotes CONVERT Specifies whether the sending message channel agent should attempt conversion of the application message data if the receiving message channel agent is unable to perform this conversion NO No conversion by sender YES Conversion by sender This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR DESCR string Plain text comment It provides descriptive information about the channel when an operator issues the DISPLAY CHANNEL command 80 MOSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL It should contain only disp
183. command TNO integer Limits the action of the STOP TRACE to particular traces identified by their trace numbers 1 to 32 Up to 8 trace numbers can be used If more than one number is used only one value for USERID can be used The default is TNO which does not limit the command USERID string Limits the action of the STOP TRACE to traces started for particular user ID Up to 8 user IDs can be used If more than one user ID is used only one value can be used for TNO Do not use this option with STAT The default is USERID which does not limit the command Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 283 SUSPEND QMGR SUSPEND QMGR Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use SUSPEND to inform other queue mangers in cluster that the local queue manager is not available for processing and cannot be sent messages Its action can be reversed by the RESUME OMGR command Notes 1 On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris 2 On OS 390 the command fails if the channel initiator has not been started Synonym None SUSPEND QMGR gt gt SUSPEND 7 CLUSTER cluste CLUSNL nlname r MODE QUIESCE 1 2 MODE FORCE gt lt CMDSCOPE qmgr name Notes Valid only on OS 390 1 2
184. d Reference First Failure Support Technology FFST Used by MOGSeries on UNIX systems MOSeries for OS 2 Warp for Windows NT and for AS 400 to detect and report software problems first in first out FIFO A queuing technique in which the next item to be retrieved is the item that has been in the queue for the longest time A forced shutdown A type of shutdown of the CICS adapter where the adapter immediately disconnects from MOSeries for OS 390 regardless of the state of any currently active tasks Contrast with quiesced shutdown Framework In MOSeries a collection of programming interfaces that allow customers or vendors to write programs that extend or replace certain functions provided in MOSeries products The interfaces are e MOGSeries data conversion interface DCI e MOsSeries message channel interface MCI e MOGSeries name service interface NSI e MO amp Series security enabling interface SET e MO amp Series trigger monitor interface TMI FRR Functional recovery routine functional recovery routine FRR An OS 390 recovery termination manager facility that enables a recovery routine to gain control in the event of a program interrupt G GCPC Generalized command preprocessor generalized command preprocessor GCPC An MOQeries for OS 390 component that processes MOSeries commands and runs them Generalized Trace Facility GTF An OS 390 service program tha
185. d for use by MOSeries are 115 and 116 A serviceability routine reserved for IBM use only not for general use Note If your IBM support center need you to use this destination for your trace data they will supply you with module CSQWVSER If you try to use destination SRV without CSQWVSER an error message will be produced at the OS 390 console when you issue the START TRACE command Allowed values and the default value depend on the type of trace started as shown in the following table Table 10 Destinations allowed for each trace type Type GTF RES SMF SRV GLOBAL Allowed Default No Allowed STAT No No Default Allowed ACCTG Allowed No Default Allowed Constraint block The constraint block places optional constraints on the kinds of data collected by the trace The allowed constraints depend on the type of trace started as shown in the following table Table 11 Constraints allowed for each trace type Type CLASS IFCID RMID USERID GLOBAL Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed STAT Allowed No No No ACCTG Allowed No No No CLASS Introduces a list of classes of data gathered The classes allowed and their meaning depend on the type of trace started Starts a trace for all classes of data integer Any number in the class column of the table that follows You can use more than one of the classes that are allowed for the type of trace started A range of c
186. d model queues LIKE gtype name The name of a queue whose parameters will be used to model this definition This parameter applies only to the appropriate DEFINE Queue command If this field is not filled in and you do not complete the parameter fields related to the command the values are taken from one of the following depending upon the queue type 120 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference Define queues SYSTEM DEFAULT ALIAS OUEUE Alias queue SYSTEM DEFAULT LOCAL OUEUE Local queue SYSTEM DEFAULT MODEL QUEUE Model queue SYSTEM DEFAULT REMOTE QUEUE Remote queue This is equivalent to defining the following object LIKE SYSTEM DEFAULT ALIAS QUEUE for an alias queue and similarly for other queue types These default queue definitions can be altered by the installation to the default values required On for OS 390 the queue manager searches page set 0 for an object with the name you specify If the object is not found the queue manager then searches the shared repository The disposition of the LIKE object is not copied to the object you are defining Notes 1 QSGDISP GROUP objects are not searched 2 LIKE is ignored if QSGDISP COPY is specified MAXDEPTH integer The maximum number of messages allowed on the queue This parameter is supported only on local and model queues Specify a value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999
187. d only if TRPTYPE is LU62 12 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows You can specify more than one value only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 62 MOSeries MQSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL 13 Not valid on OS 390 14 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The commands 63 DEFINE CHANNEL Receiver channel DEFINE CHANNEL 1 2 3 DEFINE CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE RCVR TRPTYPE DECNET gt 162 4 NETBIOS 4 SPX TCP 5 LUDP 6 7 AUTOSTART DISABLED BATCHSZ 50 CMDSCOPE 11 gt 6 L BATCHSZ integer 12 L_AUTOSTART ENABLED I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 12 CMDSCOPE 7 7 DESCR HBINT 300 DESCR string 8 1 HBINT integer 7 7 7 9 MAXMSGL 4 194 304 p MRDATA MAXMSGL integer MCAUSER string 9 MRDATA string 7 9 7 9 7 9 MREXIT MRRTY 10 MRTMR 1000 9 9 9 LMREXIT string L MRRTY integer LMRTMR integer 7 7 r MSGDATA 71 rMSGEXIT 0
188. data are a subset of the fields available for current data and are called common status fields Note that although the common data fields are the same the data values might be different for saved and current status The rest of the fields available for current data are called current only status fields Saved data consists of the common status fields noted in the syntax diagram This data is reset at the following times For all channels When the channel enters or leaves STOPPED or RETRY state On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT when the queue manager is ended For a sending channel Before requesting confirmation that a batch of messages has been received When confirmation has been received For a receiving channel Just before confirming that a batch of messages has been received For a server connection channel No data is saved Therefore a channel that has never been current cannot have any saved status Note Status is not saved until a persistent message is transmitted across a channel or a nonpersistent message is transmitted with a NPMSPEED of NORMAL Because status is saved at the end of each batch a channel will not have any saved status until at least one batch has been transmitted Current data consists of the common status fields and current only status fields as noted in the syntax diagram The data fields are continually updated as messages are sent received Short data con
189. dministration is not available on OS 390 SYSTEM AUTO RECEIVER Default receiver channel for auto definition not for AT amp T GIS UNIX Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS Digital UNIX Compaq Tru64 UNIX OS 390 SINIX and DC OSx or Tandem NSK SYSTEM AUTO SVRCONN Default server connection channel for auto definition not for AT amp T GIS UNIX Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS Digital UNIX Compaq Tru64 UNIX OS 390 SINIX and DC OSx or Tandem NSK SYSTEM DEF CLNTCONN Default client connection channel definition SYSTEM DERCLUSRCVR Default cluster receiver channel definition AIX HP UX 5 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only SYSTEM DEF CLUSSDR Default cluster sender channel definition AIX HP UX 5 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only SYSTEM DEF RECEIVER Default receiver channel definition SYSTEM DEF REQUESTER Default requester channel definition SYSTEM DEF SENDER Default sender channel definition SYSTEM DEF SERVER Default server channel definition SYSTEM DEESVRCONN Default server connection channel definition SYSTEM DEFAULT NAMELIST Default namelist definition AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only SYSTEM DEFAULT PROCESS Default process definition SYSTEMST Default storage class definition OS 390 only 6 MOSeries MQSC Command Reference Syntax diagrams How to read syntax diagrams This book contains syntax di
190. doubt For a receiving channel it is the message sequence number of the last message that was received It is updated as each message is received INDOUBT Whether the channel is currently in doubt Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 163 DISPLAY CHSTATUS This is only YES while the sending Message Channel Agent is waiting for an acknowledgment that a batch of messages which it has sent has been successfully received It is NO at all other times including the period during which messages are being sent but before an acknowledgment has been requested For a receiving channel the value is always NO LSTLUWID The logical unit of work identifier associated with the last committed batch of messages transferred LSTSEONO Message sequence number of the last message in the last committed batch This number is not incremented by nonpersistent messages using channels with a NPMSPEED of FAST STATUS Current status of the channel This is one of the following STARTING A request has been made to start the channel but the channel has not yet begun processing channel is in this state if it is waiting to become active BINDING Channel is performing channel negotiation and is not yet ready to transfer messages INITIALIZING The channel initiator is attempting to start a channel This is valid only on AIX Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS HP UX 05 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT On OS 390 this is displayed as INITIA
191. e CHLTYPE SDR CONNAME string TRPTYPE DECNET gt LU62 5 NETBIOS 5 SPX 6 UDP 7 8 7 BATCHINT 0 BATCHSZ 50 CMDSCOPE 2 XMITQ string gt 8 L BATCHSZ integer 13 BATCHINT integer I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 13 CMDSCOPE 7 7 7 7 8 0 DESCR DISCINT 6000 HBINT 300 L CONVERT YES L DESCR string L DISCINT integer i 8 HBINT integer 7 7 r LONGRTY 999 999 999 LONGTMR 1200 Like channel nane J LLONGRTY integer L LONGTMR integer 7 7 9 r MAXMSGL 4 194 304 r MCATYPE PROCESS L MAXMSGL integer Lucan c J 9 LMCATYPE THREAD 7 7 10 7 MCAUSER 7 MODENAME r MSGDATA MCAUSER string 10 L MODENAME string 11 L MSGDATA string 7 7 8 rMSGEXIT 7 NOREPLACE NPMSPEED FAST REPLACE L NPMSPEED NORMAL 11 L MSGEXIT string 7 10 12 r PASSWORD QSGDISP QMGR 2 19 12 13 L PASSWORD string QSGDISP COPY 13 L QSGDISP GROUP 58 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference RCVDATA 7 RCVEXIT 7 DEFINE CHANNEL 7 7 7 RCVDATA string RCVEXIT X string SCYDATA string CI CI 11 11 SCYEXIT SENDDATA
192. e manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled E The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The commands 235 RESET CHANNEL RESET CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use RESET CHANNEL to reset the message sequence number for an channel with optionally a specified sequence number to be used the next time that the channel is started Notes 1 On OS 390 a This is valid only for channels used for distributed Tn without CICS If you are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual b The command server and channel i
193. e the messages to another queue On a model queue with DEFTYPE SHAREDYN CFSTRUCT cannot be blank local queue with a QSGDISP other than SHARED or a model queue with a DEFTYPE other than SHAREDYN the value of CFSTRUCT does not matter For DEFINE OLOCAL with NOREPLACE and DEFINE OMODEL with NOREPLACE the Coupling Facility structure Ona local queue with OSGDISP SHARED or a model queue with a DEFTYPE SHAREDYN CFSTRUCT cannot be blank local queue with a QSGDISP other than SHARED or a model queue with a DEFTYPE other than SHAREDYN the value of CFSTRUCT does not matter Note Before you can use the queue the structure must be defined in the Coupling Facility Resource Management CFRM policy data set CLUSNL nIname The name of the namelist that specifies a list of clusters to which the queue belongs This parameter is supported only on alias local and remote queues Changes to this parameter do not affect instances of the queue that are already open Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 115 Define queues Only one of the resultant values of CLUSTER or CLUSNL can be nonblank you cannot specify a value for both On local queues this parameter cannot be set for transmission SYSTEM CHANNEL xx SYSTEM CLUSTER xx or SYSTEM COMMAND xx queues and on OS 390 only for SYSTEM OSG xx queues This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLUS
194. e APPLTYPE parameter has the value IMS PSTID The 4 character IMS program specification table PST region identifier for the connected IMS region This parameter is returned only when the APPLTYPE parameter has the value IMS OSGDISP Indicates the disposition of the queue The value is one of the following OMGR The object was defined with QSGDISP QMGR COPY The object was defined with QSGDISP COPY SHARED The object was defined with OSGDISP SHARED This parameter is returned if requested or if there is a queue sharing group environment SET Indicates whether the handle is providing set access to the queue The value is one of the following YES handle is providing set access NO The handle is not providing set access TASKNO A 7 digit CICS task number This number can be used in the CICS command CEMT SET TASK taskno PURGE to end the CICS task This parameter is returned only when the APPLTYPE parameter has the value CICS 198 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY QSTATUS TRANSID 4 character CICS transaction identifier This parameter is returned only when the APPLTYPE parameter has the value CICS URID The 32 character hexadecimal form of the 16 byte RRS unit of recovery identifier associated with the handle This parameter is returned only when the APPLTYPE parameter has the value RRSBATCH USERID The user identifier associated with the handle This parameter is not retur
195. e available active log data set space and MOSeries would halt all processing until an off load had been completed 52 MQSC Command Reference 3 4 ARCHIVE LOG You can issue an ARCHIVE LOG without the MODE QUIESCE option when a STOP MODE QUIESCE is in progress but not when a STOP MODE FORCE is in progress You can issue a DISPLAY THREAD command to discover whether an ARCHIVE LOG command is active The DISPLAY command returns message CSOVAOOI if an ARCHIVE LOG command is active Chapter 2 The commands 53 CLEAR QLOCAL CLEAR QLOCAL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use CLEAR OLOCAL to clear the messages from a local queue Synonym CLEAR OL CLEAR QLOCAL 05 22 1 CLEAR QLOCAL 9 gt 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP PRIVATE 1 gt lt 2 L_QSGDISP SHARED Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions You must specify which local queue you want to clear The command fails if either The queue has uncommitted messages that have been put on the queue under syncpoint The queue is cu
196. e channel on Start as a private channel on the local queue manager the named queue manager all active queue managers SHARED For a shared SDR ROSTR Not permitted Not permitted and SVR channel with a nonblank CONNAME start as a shared channel on the most suitable queue manager in the group For a shared RCVR SVRCONN and SVR channel with a blank CONNAME start the channel as a shared channel on all active queue managers For a shared CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR channel this option is not permitted This might automatically generate a command using CMDSCOPE and send it to the appropriate queue managers If there is no definition for the channel on the queue managers to which the command is sent or if the definition is unsuitable for the command the action fails there The definition of a channel on the queue manager where the command is entered might be used to determine the target queue manager where the command is actually run Therefore it is important that channel definitions are consistent Inconsistent channel definitions might result in unexpected command behavior 256 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference Table 9 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for START CHANNEL continued START CHANNEL CHLDISP FIXSHARED CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE local qmgr For a shared SDR ROSTR and SVR channel with a nonblank start as a shared channel on the local queue manager For all other
197. e lowest of the following e The BATCHSZ of the sending channel 76 MQSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL The BATCHSZ of the receiving channel Three less than the maximum number of uncommitted messages allowed at the sending queue manager or one if this value is zero or less Three less than the maximum number of uncommitted messages allowed at the receiving queue manager or one if this value is zero or less The maximum number of uncommitted messages is specified by the MAXUMSGS parameter of the ALTER OMGR command or the DEFINE MAXSMSGS command on OS 390 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR RCVR ROSTR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR The value must be greater than zero and less than or equal to 9999 CHLTYPE Channel type This is required It must follow immediately after the channel name parameter on all platforms except OS 390 SDR Sender channel SVR Server channel RCVR Receiver channel ROSTR Requester channel CLNTCONN Client connection channel SVRCONN Server connection channel CLUSSDR Cluster sender channel valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLUSRCVR Cluster receiver channel valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Note If you are using the REPLACE option you cannot change the channel type CLUSTER clustername The name of the cluster to which the
198. e not attempted The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR SHORTTMR integer For short retry attempts this is the maximum number of seconds to wait before reattempting connection to the remote queue manager The time is approximate zero means that another connection attempt is made as soon as possible The interval between retries might be extended if the channel has to wait to become active The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 Note For implementation reasons the maximum retry interval that can be used is 999 999 values exceeding this will be treated as 999 999 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR TPNAME string LU 6 2 transaction program name maximum length 64 characters This parameter is valid only for channels with a transport type TRPTYPE of LU 6 2 On Tandem NSK this should be set to the local TP name This can be followed by the name of the TP on the remote machine for example TPNAME localtp remotetp Both names can be up to 16 characters in length The name can also be nonblank for client connection channels to be used with OS 2 Warp On other platforms this should be set to the SNA transaction program name unless the CON
199. e number is not the total for all the queue managers in the queue sharing group OPPROCS This is the number of handles that are currently open for output for the queue For shared queues the number returned applies only to the queue manager generating the reply The number is not the total for all the queue managers in the queue sharing group OSGDISP Indicates the disposition of the queue The value displayed is one of the following OMGR The object was defined with OQSGDISP QMGR COPY The object was defined with OSGDISP COPY SHARED The object was defined with OSGDISP SHARED This parameter is returned if requested or if there is a queue sharing group environment UNCOM Indicates whether there are any uncommitted changes puts and gets pending for the queue The value displayed is one of the following YES There are uncommitted changes pending NO There are no uncommitted changes pending Handle status For handle status the following information is always returned for each queue that satisfies the selection criteria except where indicated Queue name Type of information returned TYPE parameter e User identifier USERID parameter not returned for APPLTYPE SYSTEM Application tag APPLTAG parameter 196 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY QSTATUS Application type APPLTYPE parameter Whether handle is providing input access INPUT parameter Whether handle is providing output access OU
200. e or more applications have the queue open Do not change the USAGE parameter while there are messages on the queue the format of messages changes when they are put on a transmission queue For a remote queue if both of the following are true The XMITO parameter is changed One or more applications has this queue open as a remote queue FORCE is also needed if both of the following are true Any of the RNAME ROMNAME or XMITO parameters is changed 118 MoOsSeries MOSC Command Reference Define queues One or more applications has a queue open which resolved through this definition as a queue manager alias Note FORCE is not required if this definition is in use as a reply to queue alias only If FORCE is not specified in the circumstances described the command is unsuccessful Whether applications are to be permitted to get messages from this queue ENABLED Messages can be retrieved from the queue by suitably authorized applications This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it DISABLED Applications cannot retrieve messages from the queue This parameter can also be changed using the MOSET API call HARDENBO and NOHARDENBO Whether hardening should be used to ensure that the count of the number of times that a message has been backed out is accurate This parameter is supported only on local and model queues NOHARDENBO The count is not harden
201. e same name displayed The cluster information is obtained from the repository on this queue manager This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLUSTER generic name This is optional and limits the information displayed to queues with the specified cluster name if entered with a value in brackets The value can be a generic name Only queue types for which CLUSTER is a valid parameter are restricted in this way by this parameter other queue types that meet the other selection criteria are displayed Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 203 DISPLAY QUEUE If you do not enter a value to qualify this parameter it is treated as a requested parameter and cluster name information is returned about all the queues displayed This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLUSNL generic name This is optional and limits the information displayed if entered with a value in brackets For queues defined on the local queue manager only those with the specified cluster list The value can be a generic name Only queue types for which CLUSNL is a valid parameter are restricted in this way other queue types that meet the other selection criteria are displayed For cluster queues only those belonging to clusters in the specified cluster list if the value is not a generic name If the value is a generic name no restriction is a
202. e status is for a private channel SHARED The status is for a shared channel CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which it was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled P The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Note See able 2 on page 167 able 3 on page 162 and for the permitted combinations of CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 161 DISPLAY CHSTATUS CONNAME connection name The connection name for which status information is to be displayed for the specified channel or channels This parameter can be used to limit the number of sets of status information that is displayed If it is not specified the display is not limited in this way The value returned for CONNAME might not be the same as in the channel definition and might d
203. ecify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled t The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group OSGDISP Specifies the disposition of the objects for which information is to be displayed Values are LIVE This is the default value and displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY ALL Displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY If there is a shared queue manager environment and the command is being executed on the queue manager where it was issued this option also displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP GROUP If QSGDISP ALL is specified in a shared queue manager environment the command might give duplicated names with different dispositions In a shared queue manager environment use DISPLAY NAMELIST name CMDSCOPE QSGDISP ALL 182 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY NAMELIST to list ALL objects matching name in the queue sharing group without duplicating those in the shared repository COPY Display information on
204. ecommended to use this command only if the off load task does not appear to be working or if you want to restart a previous off load attempt that failed CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSOINPI EG The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 51 ARCHIVE LOG You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled MODE QUIESCE Stops any new update activity on the MOSeries subsystem for a specified period of time and brings all existing users to a point of consistency after a commit When the specified period of time expires archiving of the current active log takes place The period of time specified is the maximum time that has to attempt a full subsystem quiesce If MODE QUIESCE is issued without the TIME parameter the value in the QUIESCE parameter of the CSQ6ARVP macro is used as the quiesce time period TIME nnn WAIT Overrides the quiesce time period spe
205. ection or cluster sender channel is received It is also called when starting a cluster receiver channel The format and maximum length of the name depends on the environment On 5 2 Warp Windows and Windows NT it is of the form 11 functionname where 11 is specified without the suffix DLL The maximum length of the string is 128 characters On OS 400 it is of the form progname libname where program name occupies the first 10 characters and libname the second 10 characters both blank padded to the right if necessary The maximum length of the string is 20 characters On AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris it is of the form Libraryname functionname The maximum length of the string is 128 characters On OS 390 it is a load module name maximum length 8 characters This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT On OS 390 it applies only to cluster sender and cluster receiver channels CLWLDATA string Cluster workload exit data maximum length 32 characters This is passed to the cluster workload exit when it is called This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLWLEXIT string Cluster workload exit name If this name is nonblank the exit is called when a message is put to a cluster queue The format and maximum length of the name depends on the environment On UNIX s
206. ed This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it HARDENBO The count is hardened INDXTYPE The type of index maintained by the queue manager to expedite MOGET operations on the queue This parameter is supported only on local and model queues NONE No index is maintained Use this when messages are usually retrieved sequentially or use both the message identifier and the correlation identifier as a selection criterion on the MOGET call MSGID An index of message identifiers is maintained Use this when messages are usually retrieved using the message identifier as a selection criterion on the MOGET call with the correlation identifier set to NULL CORRELID An index of correlation identifiers is maintained Use this when messages are usually retrieved using the correlation identifier as a selection criterion on the MOGET call with the message identifier set to NULL MSGTOKEN An index of message tokens is maintained Use this when the queue is a WLM managed queue that you are using with the Workload Manager functions of OS 390 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 119 Define queues Note You cannot set INDXTYPE to MSGTOKEN if The queue is a model queue with a definition type of SHAREDYN The queue is a temporary dynamic queue The queue is a transmission queue You specify OSGDISP SHARED If altering or replacing an existing nonshared queue the INDXTYPE parameter ca
207. ed stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk on its own specifies all channel definitions The names must all be defined to the local queue manager TYPE This is optional It can be used to restrict the display to channels of one type The value is one of the following ALL Channels of all types excluding client connection channels are displayed this is the default On OS 390 client connection channels are also displayed SDR Sender channels only are displayed SVR Server channels only are displayed RCVR Receiver channels only are displayed ROSTR Requester channels only are displayed CLNTCONN Client connection channels only are displayed SVRCONN Server connection channels only are displayed CLUSSDR Cluster sender channels only are displayed valid on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only CLUSRCVR Cluster receiver channels only are displayed valid on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp 5 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CHLTYPE type be used as a synonym for this parameter ALL Specify this to cause all parameters to be displayed If this parameter is specified any parameters that are also requested specifically have no effect all parameters are still displayed On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT this is the default if you do not specify a generi
208. ed with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY This is the default value SHARED The queue is defined with OSGDISP SHARED This is valid only in a queue sharing group environment TYPE Specifies how the messages are moved MOVE Move the messages from the source queue to the empty target queue The command fails if the target queue already contains one or more messages The messages are deleted from the source queue This is the default value ADD Move the messages from the source queue and add them to any messages already on the target queue The messages are deleted from the source queue target The name of the local queue to which messages are moved The name must be defined to the local queue manager The name of the target queue can be the same as that of the source queue only if the queue exists as both a shared and a private queue In this case the command moves messages to the queue that has the opposite disposition shared or private from that specified for the source queue on the OSGDISP parameter If an application has this queue open or has open a queue that eventually resolves to this queue the command fails The command also fails if this queue is a transmission queue and any queue that is or resolves to a remote queue that references this transmission queue is open No application can open this queue while the command is in progress If you specify TYPE MOV EE the command fails if the target queue already con
209. efined channel and an auto defined cluster sender channel of the same name the command applies to the locally defined channel If there is no locally defined channel but more than one auto defined cluster sender channel the command applies to the channel that was last added to the local queue manager s repository Synonym RESOLVE CHL RES CHL on OS 390 RESOLVE CHANNEL RESOLVE CHANNEL channel ACTION COMMIT gt BACKOUT CMDSCOPE 7 1 CHLDISP PRIVATE 1 gt gt lt 2 2 L CHLDISP SHARED CMDSCOPE qmgr name Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions channel name The name of the channel for which in doubt messages are to be resolved This is required ACTION Specifies whether to commit or back out the in doubt messages this is required Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 245 RESOLVE CHANNEL COMMIT The messages are committed that is they are deleted from the transmission queue BACKOUT The messages are backed out that is they are restored to the transmission queue CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group If CHLDISP is set to SHARED CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local qu
210. el to be started This parameter can also be changed using the MOSET API call TRIGDPTH integer The number of messages that have to be on the queue before a trigger message is written if TRIGTYPE is DEPTH The value must be greater than zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 This parameter is supported only on local and model queues This parameter can also be changed using the MQSET API call TRIGGER and NOTRIGGER Whether trigger messages are written to the initiation queue named by the INITQ parameter to trigger the application named by the PROCESS parameter NOTRIGGER Triggering is not active and trigger messages are not written to the initiation queue This parameter is supported only on local and model queues This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it TRIGGER Triggering is active and trigger messages are written to the initiation queue This parameter can also be changed using the MOSET API call TRIGMPRI integer The message priority number that will trigger this queue The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to the MAXPRTY queue manager parameter see DISPLAY OMGR on page 187 for details Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 129 Define queues This parameter can also be changed using the MOSET API call TRIGTYPE Whether and under what conditions a trigger message is written to the initiation queue named by
211. ems MOSeries for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT a file in which all significant changes to the data controlled by a queue manager are recorded If the primary log files become full MOSeries allocates secondary log files logical unit of work LUW See unit of work machine check interrupt An interruption that occurs as a result of an equipment malfunction or error A machine check interrupt can be either hardware recoverable software recoverable or nonrecoverable MCA Message channel agent MCI Message channel interface media image In MOSeries on UNIX systems for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT the sequence of log records that contain an image of an object The object can be recreated from this image message In message queuing applications a communication sent between programs In system programming information intended for the terminal operator or system administrator message channel In distributed message queuing a mechanism for moving messages from one queue manager to another A message channel comprises two message channel agents a sender at one end and a receiver at the other end and a communication link Contrast with MQI channel message channel agent MCA A program that transmits prepared messages from a transmission queue to a communication link or from a communication link to a destination queue See also message queue interface message channel interface MCI
212. environment the queue was created with OSGDISP SHARED DESCR Descriptive comment DISTL Whether distribution lists are supported by the partner queue manager Supported only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT GET Whether the queue is enabled for gets HARDENBO Whether to harden the get back out count INDXTYPE Index type supported only on OS 390 INITO Initiation queue name IPPROCS Number of handles indicating that the queue is open for input On OS 390 IPPROCS is returned as zero for queues defined with a disposition of GROUP With a dispositon of SHARED only the handles for the queue manager sending back the information are returned not the information for the whole group MAXDEPTH Maximum depth of queue MAXMSGL Maximum message length MSGDLVSQ Message delivery sequence OPPROCS Number of handles indicating that the queue is open for output On 5 390 OPPROCS is returned as zero for queues defined with a disposition of GROUP With a dispositon of SHARED only the handles for the queue manager sending back the information are returned not the information for the whole group PROCESS Process name PUT Whether the queue is enabled for puts ODEPTHHI Queue Depth High event generation threshold ODEPTHLO Queue Depth Low event generation threshold QDPHIEV Whether Queue Depth High events are generated 210 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY QUE
213. eports and create the appropriate alerts Interactive Problem Control System IPCS A component of OS 390 that permits online problem management interactive problem diagnosis online debugging for disk resident abend dumps problem tracking and problem reporting Interactive System Productivity Facility ISPF An IBM licensed program that serves as a full screen editor and dialog manager It is used for writing application programs and provides a means of generating standard screen panels and interactive dialogues between the application programmer and terminal user IPCS Interactive Problem Control System ISPE Interactive System Productivity Facility L linear logging In MOSeries on UNIX systems for OS 2 Warp and MQSeries for Windows NT the process of keeping restart data in a sequence of files New files are added to the sequence as necessary The space in which the data is written is not reused until the queue manager is restarted Contrast with circular logging listener In MOSeries distributed queuing a program that monitors for incoming network connections local definition An MQSeries object belonging to local queue manager local definition of a remote queue An MOSeries object belonging to a local queue manager This object defines the attributes of a queue that is owned by another queue manager In addition it is used for queue manager aliasing and reply to queue aliasing local qu
214. er The value returned is the disposition of the real queue which the cluster queue represents If OSGDISP LIVE is specified or defaulted or if QSGDISP ALL is specified in a shared queue manager environment the command might give duplicated names with different dispositions Note In the QSGDISP LIVE case this occurs only where a shared and a nonshared queue have the same name such a situation should not occur in a well managed system QSGDISP displays one of the following values if it is specified or if there is a shared queue manager environment Chapter 2 The commands 205 DISPLAY QUEUE OMGR The object was defined with OSGDISP OMGR GROUP The object was defined with QSGDISP GROUP COPY The object was defined with QSGDISP COPY SHARED The object was defined with QSGDISP SHARED STGCLASS generic name This is optional and limits the information displayed to queues with the storage class specified if entered with a value in brackets The value can be a generic name If you do not enter a value to qualify this parameter it is treated as a requested parameter and storage class information is returned about all the queues displayed This parameter is valid only on OS 390 TYPE queue type This is optional and specifies the type of queues you want to be displayed The default is to display all queue types this includes cluster queues if CLUSINFO is also specified You can specify an
215. er of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSOINPI command is executed the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value 248 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference RESOLVE INDOUBT command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled NID Network identifier Specifies the thread or threads to be resolved network id This is as returned by the DISPLAY THREAD command and is of the form net node net urid where net node identifies the originator of the thread except for RRSBATCH where it is omitted net urid is the hexadecimal number assigned to the unit of recovery by the originating system for the specific thread to be resolved When net node is present there must be a period between it and net urid Resolves all threads associated with the connection Specifies that if the designated queue manager is INACTIVE should search information held in the coupling facility about units of work performed by the indicated queue manager that match the connection name and network identifier M
216. er of short retry wait start attempts left This applies only to sender or server channels STOPREO Whether a user stop request is outstanding This is either YES or NO Short status The following information applies only to current channel instances The name of the queue manager that owns the channel instance Usage notes The status information that is returned for various combinations of CHLDISP CMDSCOPE and status type are summarized in Table 2 on page 167 able 3 ad bage 167 and tle 4 papa 142 166 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference Table 2 CHLDISP CMDSCOPE for DISPLAY CHSTATUS CURRENT DISPLAY CHSTATUS CHLDISP CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE qmgr name CMDSCOPE CMDSCOPE local qmgr PRIVATE Common and current only Common and current only Common and current only status for current private status for current private status for current private channels on the local queue channels on the named channels on all queue manager queue manager managers SHARED Common and current only Common and current only Common and current only status for current shared status for current shared status for current shared channels on the local queue channels on the named channels on all queue manager queue manager managers ALL Common and current only Common and current only Common and current only status for current private and shared channels on the local queue manager status for current private a
217. es of two local queues the one you want to move messages from the source queue and the one you want to move the messages to the target queue source name of the local queue from which messages are moved The name must be defined to the local queue manager The command fails if the queue contains uncommitted messages If an application has this queue open or has open a queue that eventually resolves to this queue the command fails For example the command fails if this queue is a transmission queue and any queue that is or resolves to a remote queue that references this transmission queue is open An application can open this queue while the command is in progress but the application waits until the command has completed CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group command is executed the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 225 MOVE QLOCAL You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled OSGDISP Specifies the disposition of the source queue PRIVATE The queue is defin
218. es on an initiation queue the trigger monitor retrieves the message It uses the information in the trigger message to start a process that serves the queue on which a trigger event occurred trigger monitor interface TMI The MOSeries interface to which customer or vendor written trigger monitor programs must conform A part of the MOSeries Framework two phase commit protocol for the coordination of changes to recoverable resources when more than one resource manager is used by a single transaction Contrast with single phase commit U UIS User identifier service undelivered message queue See dead letter queue Glossary of terms and abbreviations 301 Glossary undo redo record A log record used in recovery The redo part of the record describes a change to be made to an MOSeries object The undo part describes how to back out the change if the work is not committed unit of recovery A recoverable sequence of operations within a single resource manager Contrast with unit of work unit of work A recoverable sequence of operations performed by an application between two points of consistency A unit of work begins when a transaction starts or after a user requested syncpoint It ends either at a user requested syncpoint or at the end of a transaction Contrast with unit of recovery user identifier service UIS In MQSeries for OS 2 Warp the facility that allows MOI applications to associate a user ID othe
219. es that cannot be routed to their correct destination are put The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group DEFXMITO string Local name of the default transmission queue on which messages destined for a remote queue manager are put if there is no other suitable transmission queue defined DESCR string Plain text comment It provides descriptive information about the queue manager It should contain only displayable characters The maximum length is 64 characters In a DBCS installation it can contain DBCS characters subject to a maximum length of 64 bytes 34 MQsSeries MOSC Command Reference ALTER QMGR Note If characters used that are not the coded character set identifier CCSID for this queue manager they might be translated incorrectly if the information is sent to another queue manager IGQ Whether intra group queuing is to be used This parameter applies only to OS 390 ENABLED Message trans
220. et its parameters DEFINE QREMOTE A remote queue is one that is owned by another queue manager that application processes connected to this queue manager need to access Synonym DEF OR DEFINE QREMOTE gt gt DEFINE QREMOTE q name r CMDSCOPE 7 3 4 CMDSCOPE qmgr name 4 L CMDSCOPE r QSGDISP QMGR 3 gt gt 4 define attrs H common q attrs H 056015 1 7 4 QSGDISP GROUP gt gt lt remote q attrs H Define attrs NOREPLACE LIKE qremote name REPLACE Common q attrs 1 1 1 r DEFPRTY 0 DEFPSIST NO DESCR 7 gt LDEFPRTY integer DEFPSIST YES DESCR string 1 r PUT ENABLED PUT DISABLED Remote q attrs 1 2 1 2 r CLUSNL CLUSTER gt 2 2 CLUSNL n name CLUSTER clustername Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 113 DEFINE QREMOTE a 2 1 1 DEFBIND OPEN RNAME 7 ROMNAME 2 RNAME string L_RQMNAME string L DEFBIND NOTFIXED 1 5 1 SCOPE QMGR XMITQ 7 XMITQ string 5 SCOPE CELL Notes 1 This is the default supplied with MOSeries but your installation might have changed it 2 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun
221. eue A queue that belongs to the local queue manager A local queue can contain a list of messages waiting to be processed Contrast with remote queue local queue manager The queue manager to which a program is connected and that provides message queuing services to the program Queue managers to which a program is not connected are called remote queue managers even if they are running on the same system as the program locale On UNIX systems a subset of a user s environment that defines conventions for a specific culture such as time numeric or monetary formatting and character classification collation or conversion The queue manager CCSID is derived from the locale of the user ID that created the queue manager Glossary of terms and abbreviations 295 Glossary locally defined object On OS 390 an object whose definition is stored on page set zero The definition can be accessed only by the queue manager that defined it Also known as a privately defined object log In MOSeries a file recording the work done by queue managers while they receive transmit and deliver messages to enable them to recover in the event of failure log control file In MOSeries on UNIX systems for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT the file containing information needed to monitor the use of log files for example their size and location and the name of the next available file log file In MOSeries on UNIX syst
222. eue command that had the parameters manager is in a queue sharing group If the OSGDISP GROUD Any object residing on definition is successful the following the page set of the queue manager that command is generated and sent to all active executes the command except a local copy queue managers in the queue sharing group of the object is not affected by this to cause them to make or refresh local copies command If the command is successful the on page set 0 following command is generated and sent to PROCESS name REPLACE QSGDISP COPY all active queue managers in the queue sharing group to cause them to refresh local copies on page set 0 DEFINE PROCESS name REPLACE QSGDISP COPY PRIVATE The object resides on the page set of the Not permitted queue manager that executes the command and was defined with OSGDISP OMGR or OSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository is unaffected OMGR The object definition resides on the page set The object is defined on the page set of the of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters OSGDISP OMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value queue manager that executes the command This is the default value REPLACE and NOREPLACE Whether the existing definition and on OS 390 with the sa
223. eue manager 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled CHLDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only and can take the values of PRIVATE SHARED In conjunction with the various values of the CMDSCOPE parameter this parameter controls two types of channel SHARED A receiving channel is shared if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue sharing group A sending channel is shared if its transmission queue has a disposition of SHARED PRIVATE A receiving channel is private if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue manager A sending channel is private if its transmission queue has a disposition other than SHARED Note This disposition is not related to the disposition set by the disposition of the queue sharing group of the channel definition The combination of the CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE parameters also controls from which queue manager the channel is operated The possible options are On the local queue manager where the command is issued On another specific named queue manager in the group The various combination
224. eue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 149 DISPLAY CHANNEL DISPLAY CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Dd Use DISPLAY CHANNEL to display a channel definition Notes 1 OS 390 this is valid only for channels used for distributed queuing without CICS If you are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual 2 You can only display cluster sender channels if they were created manually Synonym DIS CHL DISPLAY CHANNEL TYPE ALL DISPLAY CHANNEL generic channel name gt SDR SVR ALL RCVR RQSTR CLNTCONN SVRCONN 1 CLUSSDR 1 CLUSRCVR CMDSCOPE 4 QSGDISP LIVE 4 lt 5 I QSGDISP ALL requested attrs H CMDSCOPE qmgr name QSGDISP QMGR 5 056015 L CMDSCOPE 5 L QSGDISP GROUP QSGDISP PRIVATE Requested attrs 150 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY CHANNEL 1 ALTDATE 1 ALTT
225. eue manager is to provide a repository manager service This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT REPOSNL The name of a list of clusters for which this queue manager is to provide a repository manager service This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT STRSTPEV Whether start and stop events are generated SYNCPT Whether syncpoint support is available with the queue manager On OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 UNIX systems and Windows NT it is always available TRIGINT The trigger interval 192 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY QSTATUS DISPLAY QSTATUS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp UNIX systems Compaq NSK Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DISPLAY OSTATUS to display the status of one or more queues Synonym DIS 5 DISPLAY QSTATUS CMDSCOPE 7 DISPLAY QSTATUS generic q name CMDSCOPE r TYPE QUEUE I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 5 5 OPENTYPE ALL ALL OPENTYPE INPUT TYPE HANDLE OPENTYPE OUTPUT queue status gt lt handle status Queue status CURDEPTH IPPROCS OPPROCS QSGDISP UNCOM Handle status Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 193 DISPLAY QSTATUS Y APPLTA
226. eue sharing group to cause them to make or refresh local copies on page set 0 DEFINE STGCLASS name REPLACE QSGDISP COPY 134 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DEFINE STGCLASS OSGDISP ALTER DEFINE PRIVATE The object resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command and was defined with OSGDISP OMGR or OSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository is unaffected Not permitted OMGR The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters OSGDISP OMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value The object is defined on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command This is the default value XCFGNAME group name If you are using the IMS bridge this is the name of the XCF group to which the IMS system belongs This is the group name specified in the IMS parameter list This is 1 through 8 characters The first character is in the range A through Z subsequent characters are A through Z or 0 through 9 XCFMNAME member name If you are using the IMS bridge this is the XCF member name of the IMS system within the XCF group specified in XCFGNAME This is the member name specified in the IMS parameter list This is 1 through 16
227. euing services on a server for local user applications The queues used by the applications reside on the server See also MQSeries client client application An application running on a workstation and linked to a client that gives the application access to queuing services on a server client connection channel type The type of MQI channel definition associated with an MOQSeries client See also server connection channel type cluster A network of queue managers that are logically associated in some way coded character set identifier CCSID The name of a coded set of characters and their code point assignments command In an administration instruction that can be carried out by the queue manager command prefix CPF In MOSeries for OS 390 a character string that identifies the queue manager to which for OS 390 commands are directed and from which MOSeries for OS 390 operator messages are received command processor The MOSeries component that processes commands command server The MOSeries component that reads commands from the system command input queue verifies them and passes valid commands to the command processor commit An operation that applies all the changes made during the current unit of recovery or unit of work After the operation is complete a new unit of recovery or unit of work begins Contrast with backout completion code A return code indicating how a
228. every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group DEFBIND Specifies the binding to be used when the application specifies BIND AS Q DEF on the MQOPEN call and the queue is a cluster queue OPEN The queue handle is bound to a specific instance of the cluster queue when the queue is opened NOTFIXED The queue handle is not bound to any particular instance of the 116 MOSC Command Reference Define queues cluster queue This allows the queue manager to select a specific queue instance when the message is put using MOPUT and to change that selection subsequently should the need arise The MOPUT call always behaves as if NOTFIXED had been specified This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT DEFPRTY integer The default priority of messages put on the queue The value must be greater than or equal to zero the lowest priority and less than or equal to the MAXPRTY queue manager parameter MAXPRTY is 9 DEFPSIST Specifies the message persistence to be used when applications specify the PERSISTENCE AS DEF option NO Messages on this queue lost across a restart of the queue manager This is the default supplied with MQSeries but your installation might have changed it YES Messages on this queue survive a restart
229. ew message sequence number which must be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 999 999 999 This is optional 238 MQSC Command Reference RESET CLUSTER RESET CLUSTER Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use RESET CLUSTER to perform special operations on clusters Notes 1 On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris 2 On OS 390 the command fails if the channel initiator has not been started Synonym None RESET CLUSTER CMDSCOPE 7 1 RESET CLUSTER clustername ACTION FORCEREMOVE gt 2 CMDSCOPE qmgr name gt QMNAME qmname gt lt Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions clustername The name of the cluster to be reset This is required ACTION FORCEREMOVE Requests that the queue manager is forcibly removed from the cluster This might be needed to ensure proper clean up after a queue manager has been deleted This action can be requested only by a repository queue manager CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group af The comma
230. f more than one exit program by specifying multiple strings separated by commas However the total number of characters specified must not exceed 999 On OS 400 you can specify the names of up to 10 exit programs by specifying multiple strings separated by commas On other platforms you can specify only one receive exit name for each channel The format and maximum length of the name is the same as for MSGEXIT REPLACE and NOREPLACE Whether the existing definition and on OS 390 with the same disposition is to be replaced with this one This is optional The default is NOREPLACE Any object with a different disposition is not changed This parameter applies only to the DEFINE CHANNEL command NOREPLACE The definition should not replace any existing definition of the same name REPLACE The definition should replace any existing definition of the same name If a definition does not exist one is created Note that REPLACE does not alter the channel status SCYDATA string Channel security exit user data maximum length 32 characters This is passed to the channel security exit when it is called SCYEXIT string Channel security exit name On platforms other than Tandem NSK if this name is nonblank the exit is called at the following times Immediately after establishing a channel Before any messages are transferred the exit is given the opportunity to instigate security flows to validate connection authorization
231. f shared memory introduced in OS 400 V4R4 Glossary termination notification A pending event that is activated when a CICS subsystem successfully connects to MOSeries for OS 390 thlqual Target library high level qualifier thread In MOSeries the lowest level of parallel execution available on an operating system platform time independent messaging See asynchronous messaging TMI Trigger monitor interface trace In MOSeries a facility for recording MQSeries activity The destinations for trace entries can include GTF and the system management facility SMF tranid See transaction identifier transaction identifier In CICS a name that is specified when the transaction is defined and that is used to invoke the transaction transmission program See message channel agent transmission queue A local queue on which prepared messages destined for a remote queue manager are temporarily stored trigger event An event such as a message arriving on a queue that causes a queue manager to create a trigger message on an initiation queue triggering In MOSeries a facility allowing a queue manager to start an application automatically when predetermined conditions on a queue are satisfied trigger message A message containing information about the program that a trigger monitor is to start trigger monitor A continuously running application serving one or more initiation queues When a trigger message arriv
232. fect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Specifies whether programs currently being executed are allowed to finish QUIESCE Allows programs currently being executed to finish processing No new program is allowed to start This is the default This option means that all connections to other address spaces must terminate before the queue manager stops The system Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 279 STOP QMGR FORCE operator can determine whether any connections remain by using the DISPLAY THREAD command and can cancel remaining connections using OS 390 commands This option deregisters MOSeries from the MVS automatic restart manager ARM Terminates programs currently being executed including utilities No new program is allowed to start This option might cause in doubt situations This option might not work if all the active logs are full and log archiving has not occurred In this situation it will be necessary to issue the OS 390 CANCEL command to terminate This option deregisters MQSeries from the MVS automatic restart manager ARM RESTART 280 MOQsSeries MOSC Command Reference Terminates programs currently being executed including utilities No new program is allowed to start This option might cause in doubt situations This option might not work if all the active logs are full and log archiving has not occurred In this situation it will be
233. fer between queue managers within a queue sharing group uses the shared transmission queue SYSTEM QSG TRANSMIT QUEUE DISABLED Message transfer between queue managers within a queue sharing group uses nonshared transmission queues and channels This is the same mechanism used for message transfer between queue managers that are not part of a queue sharing group IGQAUT Specifies the type of authority checking and therefore the user IDs to be used by the IGQ agent IGQA This establishes the authority to put messages to a destination queue This parameter applies only to OS 390 DEF Indicates that the default user ID should be used to establish authority to put messages to a destination queue This is the default value For one user ID check this involves using the user ID referred to as OSGSEND of the queue manager within the QSG that put the messages to the SYSTEM QSG TRANSMIT QUEUE For two user ID checks this involves using the QSGSEND user ID and the user ID CTX Indicates that the user ID from the UserIdentifier field in the message descriptor of a message on the SYSTEM OSG TRANSMIT QUEUE should be used to establish authority to put messages to a destination queue For one user ID check this involves using the QSGSEND user ID For two user ID checks this may involve using the OSGSEND user ID the user ID and the alternate user id referred to as ALT taken from the UserIdentifier field in the message
234. fer to message CSQW127I in the manual for more information about trace qualification 1 2 Display both summary and qualification information 5 Display both summary and qualification information If no parameter follows DETAIL either DETAIL or just DETAIL is used type 1 trace information is displayed CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSOINPI command is executed the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled Chapter 2 The commands 221 DISPLAY TRACE Destination block DEST Limits the list to traces started for particular destinations More than one value can be specified but do not use the same value twice If no value is specified the list is not limited Possible values and their meanings are Generalized Trace Facility RES A wrap around table residing in the ECSA extended common service area SMF The System Management Faci
235. fined object process definition object An MQSeries object that contains the definition of an MOSeries application For example a queue manager uses the definition when it works with trigger messages programmable command format PCF A type of MObSeries message used by User administration applications to put PCF commands onto the system command input queue of a specified queue manager User administration applications to get the results of a PCF command from a specified queue manager queue manager as a notification that an event has occurred Contrast with MQSC program temporary fix PTF A solution or by pass of a problem diagnosed by IBM field engineering as the result of a defect in a current unaltered release of a program Program temporary fix Q queue An object Message queuing applications can put messages on and get messages from a queue A queue is owned and maintained by a queue manager Local queues can contain a list of messages waiting to be processed Queues of other types cannot contain messages they point to other queues or can be used as models for dynamic queues queue manager A system program that provides queuing services to applications It provides an application programming interface so that programs 298 MQSC Command Reference can access messages on the queues that the queue manager owns See also local queue manager and remote q
236. fining Notes 1 QSGDISP GROUP objects are not searched 2 LIKE is ignored if OSGDISP COPY is specified NAMES name List of names The names can be of any type but must conform to the rules for naming MOGeries objects with a maximum length of 48 characters An empty list is valid specify NAMES The maximum number of names in the list is 256 OSGDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only Specifies the disposition of the object to which you are applying the command that is where it is defined and how it behaves QSGDISP ALTER DEFINE COPY The object definition resides the page set The object is defined on the page set of the of the queue manager that executes the queue manager that executes the command command The object was defined using a using the QSGDISP GROUP object of the command that had the parameters same name as the LIKE object OSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR is not affected by this command GROUP The object definition resides in the shared The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a repository This is allowed only if the queue command that had the parameters manager is in a queue sharing group If the OSGDISP GROUD Any object residing on definition is successful the following the page set of the queue manager that comm
237. for other channel types These default channel definitions can be altered by the installation to the default values required On for OS 390 the queue manager searches page set 0 for an object with the name you specify The disposition of the LIKE object is not copied to the object you are defining Notes 1 QSGDISP GROUP objects are not searched 2 LIKE is ignored if QSGDISP COPY is specified However the group object defined is used as a LIKE object LONGRTY nteger When a sender server or cluster sender channel is attempting to connect to the remote queue manager and the count specified by SHORTRTY has been exhausted this specifies the maximum number of further attempts that are made to connect to the remote queue manager at intervals specified by LONGTMR If this count is also exhausted without success an error is logged to the operator and the channel is stopped The channel must subsequently be restarted with a command it is not started automatically by the channel initiator The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR LONGTMR integer For long retry attempts this is the maximum number of seconds to wait before reattempting connection to the remote queue manager The time is approximate zero means that another connection attempt is made as
238. fore it is deallocated DEALLCT DISPLAY LOG The current parameter values for MAXRTU and DEALLCT that can be set by the SET LOG command Availability status of allocated dedicated tape units Volume and data set names associated with all busy tape units Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 179 DISPLAY MAXSMSGS DISPLAY MAXSMSGS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DISPLAY MAXSMSGS to see the maximum number of messages that a task can get or put within a single unit of recovery Notes 1 This command is valid only on OS 390 For other platforms use the MAXUMSGS parameter of the DISPLAY command instead 2 You can issue the DISPLAY MAXSMSGS command at any time to see the number of messages allowed Synonym DIS MAXSM DISPLAY MAXSMSGS r CMDSCOPE 7 DISPLAY MAXSMSGS gt Notes 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSOINPI 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name 180
239. from a communication link and puts them on a local queue recovery log In MOSeries for OS 390 data sets containing information needed to recover messages queues and the subsystem MOSeries for OS 390 writes each record to a data set called the active log When the active log is full its contents are off loaded to a DASD or tape data set called the archive log Synonymous with log recovery termination manager RTM A program that handles all normal and abnormal termination of tasks by passing control to a recovery routine associated with the terminating function Registry In Windows NT a secure database that provides a single source for system and application configuration data Registry Editor In Windows NT the program item that allows the user to edit the Registry Registry Hive In Windows NT the structure of the data stored in the Registry relative byte address RBA The displacement in bytes of a stored record or control interval from the beginning of the storage space allocated to the data set to which it belongs remote queue queue belonging to a remote queue manager Programs can put messages on remote queues but they cannot get messages from remote queues Contrast with local queue remote queue manager To a program a queue manager that is not the one to which the program is connected remote queue object See local definition of a remote queue remote queuing In message queui
240. g 10 PASSWORD string QSGDISP COPY 10 QSGDISP GROUP 6 6 r RCVDATA RCVEXIT 7 gt CJ CJ 9 9 RCVDATA string RCVEXIT string 6 6 r SCYDATA 7 SCYEXIT gt SCYDATA string SCYEXIT string 6 6 r SENDDATA SENDEXIT gt CJ CJ 9 9 L_SENDDATA string SENDEXIT 7 string 68 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL 6 8 6 8 USERID gt lt 8 8 TPNAME string USERID string Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on 5 390 2 Valid only on OS 390 3 This is not mandatory on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS 5 Valid only for clients to be run on DOS OS 2 Warp Windows or Windows NT 6 X This is the default supplied with MOSeries but your installation might have changed it 7 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 8 Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 9 You can specify more than one value only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 10 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 69 DEFINE CHANNEL Server connection channe
241. gram should run as a thread or a process PROCESS The message channel agent runs as a separate process THREAD The message channel agent runs as a separate thread In situations where a threaded listener is required to service a large number of incoming requests resources can become strained In this case it is recommended that multiple listener processes are used and that incoming requests are targeted at specific listeners via the port number specified on the listener This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR ROSTR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR It is supported only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT On OS 390 it is supported only for channels with a channel type of CLUSRCVR When specified in a CLUSRCVR definition MCATYPE is used by a remote machine to determine the corresponding CLUSSDR definition MCAUSER string Message channel agent user identifier If string is nonblank it is the user identifier which is to be used by the message channel agent for authorization to access MQSeries resources including if PUTAUT is DEF authorization to put the message to the destination queue for receiver or requester channels If it is blank the message channel agent uses its default user identifier The default user identifier is derived from the user ID that started the receiving channel The possible values are Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 83 DEFINE CHANNEL On
242. grated Language Environment This replaces the AS 400 Original Program Model OPM ini file See configuration file initialization input data sets Data sets used by MOSeries for OS 390 when it starts up initiation queue A local queue on which the queue manager puts trigger messages input output parameter A parameter of an MOI call in which you supply information when you make the call and in which the queue manager changes the information when the call completes or fails input parameter A parameter of an MOI call in which you supply information when you make the call installable services In MOSeries on UNIX systems MOSeries for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT additional functionality provided as independent components The installation of each component is optional in house or third party components can be used instead See also authorization service name service and user identifier service instrumentation event A facility that can be used to monitor the operation of queue managers in a network of MOSeries systems MOSeries provides instrumentation events for monitoring queue manager resource definitions performance conditions and channel conditions Instrumentation events can be used Glossary by a user written reporting mechanism in an administration application that displays the events to a system operator They also allow applications acting as agents for other administration networks to monitor r
243. h PCF command messages are sent not for OS 390 SYSTEM ADMIN PERFM EVENT Queue for performance events SYSTEM ADMIN OMGR EVENT Queue for queue manager events SYSTEM CHANNEL COMMAND Queue used for distributed queuing on OS 390 using CICS SYSTEM CHANNEL INITO Queue used for distributed queuing without CICS on OS 390 SYSTEM CHANNEL REPLY INFO Queue used for distributed queuing on OS 390 without CICS SYSTEM CHANNEL SEQNO Queue used for distributed queuing on OS 390 using CICS SYSTEM CHANNEL SYNCQ Queue used for distributed queuing without CICS on 05 390 SYSTEM CICS INITIATION QUEUE Queue used for triggering not for OS 390 SYSTEM CLUSTER COMMAND QUEUE Queue used to communicate repository changes between queue managers AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only SYSTEM CLUSTER REPOSITORY QUEUE Queue used to hold information about the repository AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only SYSTEM CLUSTER TRANSMIT QUEUE Transmission queue for all destinations managed by cluster support AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only SYSTEM COMMAND INPUT SYSTEM COMMAND REPLY MODEL Queue to which command messages are sent on OS 390 Model queue definition for command replies for OS 390 SYSTEM DEAD LETTER QUEUE Dead letter queue not for OS 390 S
244. h exceeds the new maximum are not affected Applications can use this parameter to determine the size of buffer they need to retrieve messages from the queue Therefore the value should only be reduced if it is known that this will not cause an application to operate incorrectly MSGDLVSO Message delivery sequence This parameter is supported only on local and model queues PRIORITY Messages are delivered in response to MOGET calls first in first out FIFO order within priority This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it FIFO Messages are delivered in response to MOGET calls in FIFO order Priority is ignored for messages on this queue If the message delivery sequence is changed from PRIORITY to FIFO while there are messages on the queue the order of the messages already enqueued is not changed Messages added to the queue subsequently take the default priority of the queue and so might be processed before some of the existing messages If the message delivery sequence is changed from FIFO to PRIORITY the messages enqueued while the queue was set to FIFO take the default priority PROCESS string The local name of the process This parameter is supported only on local and model queues This is the name of a process instance that identifies the application started The process does not have to be defined when the local queue is
245. h the same name as ROMNAME is used instead as the transmission queue This parameter is ignored if the definition is being used as a queue manager alias and ROMNAME is the name of the local queue manager It is also ignored if the definition is used as a reply to queue alias definition 130 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference Usage notes Usage notes 1 For alias queues a DEFINE QALIAS othergname TARGQ aliasqueue CLUSTER c has the effect of advertising queue aliasqueue by the name otherqname DEFINE QALIAS otherqname TARGQ aliasqueue has the effect of allowing queue advertised by the name otherqname to be used on this queue manager by the name al iasqueue 2 For remote queues a DEFINE QREMOTE rqueue RNAME otherg RQMNAME otherqm CLUSTER cl has the effect of advertising this queue manager as a store and forward gateway to which messages for queue rqueue can be sent It has no effect as a reply to queue alias except on the local queue manager DEFINE QREMOTE otherqm RNAME RQMNAME anotherqm XMITQ xq CLUSTER has the effect of advertising this queue manager as a store and forward gateway to which messages for anotherqm can be sent ROMNAME can itself be the name of a cluster queue manager within the cluster thus as with OALIAS definitions you can map the advertised queue manager name to another name locally It is possible for the values of ROMNAME and OREMOTE to be the same if ROMNAME is itself a clus
246. h trace information is gathered You cannot use this option for STAT or traces Starts a trace for all user IDs This is the default userid Names a user ID You can use up to 8 user IDs a separate trace is started for each Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 269 STOP CHANNEL STOP CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use STOP CHANNEL to stop a channel Notes 1 On OS 390 a This is valid only for channels used for distributed ming without CICS If you are using CICS for distributed queuing see the interommaenicatiod manual b The command server and the channel initiator must be running You need to issue a START CHANNEL command to restart the channel it will not restart automatically See the manual for information about restarting stopped channels This command can be issued to a channel of any type except CLNTCONN channels including those that have been defined automatically Where there is both a locally defined channel and an auto defined cluster sender channel of the same name the command applies to the locally defined channel If there is no locally defined channel but more than one auto defined cluster sender channel the command applies to the channel that was last added to the local queue manager s repository Synonym STOP CHL STOP CHANNEL r MODE QUIESCE CMDS
247. hannel current at the same time the requester is acting as a receiver This occurs if several senders at different queue managers each initiate a session with this receiver using the same channel name For channels of other types there can only be one instance current at any time For all channel types however there can be more than one set of saved status information available for a given channel name At most one of these sets relates to a current instance of the channel the rest relate to previously current instances Multiple instances arise if different transmission queue names or connection names have been used in connection with the same channel This can happen in the following cases At a sender or server If the same channel has been connected to by different requesters servers only If the transmission queue name has been changed in the definition If the connection name has been changed in the definition Ata receiver or requester If the same channel has been connected to by different senders or servers If the connection name has been changed in the definition for requester channels initiating connection The number of sets which are displayed for a given channel can be limited by using the XMITO CONNAME and CURRENT parameters on the command generic channel name The name of the channel definition for which status information is to be displayed A trailing asterisk matches all channel definitions
248. haracters in the range 00 99 An asterisk on its own specifies all page set identifiers See QSGDISP Specifies the disposition of the objects for which information is to be displayed Values are LIVE ALL 216 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference This is the default value and displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY Displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or OSGDISP COPY If there is a shared queue manager environment and the command is being executed on the queue manager where it was issued this option also displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP GROUP If QSGDISP ALL is specified in a shared queue manager environment the command might give duplicated names with different dispositions In a shared queue manager environment use DISPLAY STGCLASS name CMDSCOPE QSGDISP ALL to list ALL objects matching name DISPLAY STGCLASS in the queue sharing group without duplicating those in the shared repository COPY Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP COPY GROUP Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP GROUP This is allowed only if there is a shared queue manager environment PRIVATE Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY QMGR Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR QSGDISP displays one of the following values if it is spe
249. he name of more than one exit program by specifying multiple strings separated by commas However the total number of characters specified must not exceed 999 On OS 400 you can specify the names of up to 10 exit programs by specifying multiple strings separated by commas On other platforms you can specify only one send exit name for each channel The format and maximum length of the name is the same as for MSGEXIT SEQWRAP integer When this value is reached sequence numbers wrap to start again at 1 This value is non negotiable and must match in both the local and remote channel definitions The value must be greater than or equal to 100 and less than or equal to 999 999 999 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR RCVR ROSTR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR SHORTRTY integer The maximum number of attempts that are made by a sender server or cluster sender channel to connect to the remote queue manager at intervals specified by SHORTTMR before the normally longer LONGRTY and LONGTMR are used Retry attempts are made if the channel fails to connect initially whether it is started automatically by the channel initiator or by an explicit command and also if the connection fails after the channel has 90 MQSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL successfully connected However if the cause of the failure is such that retry is unlikely to be successful retries ar
250. hen A message arrives at a queue manager destined for a queue that is not yet defined on that queue manager A message arrives at a queue manager but the queue for which it is destined cannot receive it because possibly The queue is full 190 MOSeries Command Reference DISPLAY QMGR The queue is inhibited for puts The sending node does not have authority to put the message on the queue exception message needs to be generated but the queue named is not known to that queue manager Note Messages that have passed their expiry time are not transferred to this queue when they are discarded If the dead letter queue is not defined or full or unusable for some other reason a message which would have been transferred to it by a message channel agent is retained instead on the transmission queue If a dead letter queue or undelivered message queue is not specified all blanks are returned for this parameter DEFXMITQ Default transmission queue name This is the transmission queue on which messages destined for a remote queue manager are put if there is no other suitable transmission queue defined DESCR Description DISTL Whether distribution lists are supported by the queue manager This is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT IGQ 05 390 only whether intra group queuing is to be used IGOAUT On OS 390 only displays the type of authority checking
251. hin the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled command is executed the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group QSGDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only Specifies the disposition of the object to which you are applying the command that is where it is defined and how it behaves COPY The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR is not affected by this command GROUP The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP GROUP Any object residing on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command except a local copy of the object is not affected by this command If the command is successful the following command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the queue sharing group to cause them to delete local copies on page set 0 DELET
252. hine for example CONNAME PPPP LOCALLU REMOTELU For receiver and non fully qualified server channels this is the process name of the SNAX APC process and the name of the local LU for example CONNAME PPPP LOCALLU The name of the local LU can be an asterisk indicating any name If ICE is used For sender requester and fully qualified server channels this is the process name of the ICE process the ICE open name the name of the local LU and the name of the partner LU on the remote machine for example CONNAME PPPP OPEN LOCALLU REMOTELU Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 79 DEFINE CHANNEL For receiver and non fully qualified server channels this is the process name of the SNAX APC process the ICE open name and the name of the local LU for example CONNAME PPPP 0PEN LOCALLU The name of the local LU can be an asterisk indicating any name NetBIOS A unique NetBIOS name limited to 16 characters SPX The 4 byte network address the 6 byte node address and the 2 byte socket number These values must be entered in hexadecimal with a period separating the network and node addresses The socket number must be enclosed in brackets for example CONNAME Oa0bOcOd 804abcde23a1 5e86 If the socket number is omitted the MOSeries default value X 5e86 is assumed TCP Either the host name or the network address of the remote machine or the local machine for
253. his object This is equivalent to specifying LIKE SYSTEM DEFAULT PROCESS A default definition for each object type is provided but these can mi altered by the installation to the default values required See On for OS 390 the queue manager searches page set 0 for an object with the name you specify The disposition of the LIKE object is not copied to the object you are defining Notes 1 QSGDISP GROUP objects are not searched 2 LIKE is ignored if OSGDISP COPY is specified QSGDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only Specifies the disposition of the object to which you are applying the command that is where it is defined and how it behaves 102 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DEFINE PROCESS OSGDISP ALTER DEFINE COPY The object definition resides on the page set The object is defined on the page set of the of the queue manager that executes the queue manager that executes the command command The object was defined using a using the OSGDISP GROUD object of the command that had the parameters same name as the LIKE object OSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using a command that had the parameters OSGDISP OMGR is not affected by this command GROUP The object definition resides in the shared The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a repository This is allowed only if the qu
254. ic name and do not request any specific parameters CHANNEL generic name This is optional and limits the information displayed to cluster queue managers with the specified channel name The value can be a generic name CLUSTER generic name This is optional and limits the information displayed to cluster queue managers with the specified cluster name The value can be a generic name CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Requested parameters Specify one or more parameters that define the data to be displayed The parameters can be specified in any order but do not specify the same parameter more than once Some parameters are relevant only for channels of
255. ies for Windows NT V5 1 e MOSeries link for R 3 V1 2 PDF versions of all current MOSeries books are also available from the MOSeries product family Web site at http www ibm com software mqseries BookManager format The MOSeries library is supplied BookManager format on a variety of online library collection kits including the Transaction Processing and Data collection kit SK2T 0730 You can view the softcopy books in IBM BookManager format using the following IBM licensed programs BookManager READ 2 BookManager READ 6000 BookManager READ DOS BookManager READ MVS BookManager READ VM BookManager READ for Windows PostScript format The library is provided in PostScript PS format with many Version 2 products Books in PostScript format can be printed on a PostScript printer or viewed with a suitable viewer Windows Help format The MQbSeries for Windows User s Guide is provided in Windows Help format with MQSeries for Windows Version 2 0 and for Windows Version 2 1 MQSeries information available on the Internet The product family Web site is at http www ibm com software mqseries By following links from this Web site you can e Obtain latest information about the MOSeries product family e Access the books in HTML and PDF formats Download SupportPacs Bibliography
256. iffer between the current channel status and the saved channel status Using CONNAME for limiting the number of sets of status is therefore not recommended For example if CONNAME Is blank in the channel definition or when using TCP is in host name format the channel status value will have the resolved IP address Includes the port number again when using the current channel status value will include the port number but the saved channel status value will not This value could also be the queue manager name or queue sharing group name of the remote system CURRENT SAVED This is the default and indicates that current status information as held by the channel initiator for current channels only is to be displayed Both common and current only status information can be requested for current channels Short status information is not displayed if this parameter is specified Specify this to cause saved status information for both current and inactive channels to be displayed Only common status information can be displayed Short and current only status information is not displayed for current channels if this parameter is specified On OS 390 the STATUS item is not displayed SHORT ALL This indicates that short status information and the STATUS item for current channels only is to be displayed Other common status and current only status information is not displayed for current channels if
257. ined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR is not affected by this command GROUP The object definition resides in the shared The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a repository This is allowed only if the queue command that had the parameters manager is in a queue sharing group If the OSGDISP GROUD Any object residing on definition is successful the following the page set of the queue manager that command is generated and sent to all active executes the command except a local copy queue managers in the queue sharing group of the object is not affected by this to cause them to make or refresh local copies command If the command is successful the page set 0 following command is generated and sent to CHANNEL name CHLTYPE type all active queue managers in the REPLACE QSGDISP COPY queue sharing group to cause them to refresh local copies on page set 0 DEFINE CHANNEL name CHLTYPE type REPLACE QSGDISP COPY PRIVATE The object resides on the page set of the Not permitted queue manager that executes the command was defined with OSGDISP OMGR or QSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository is unaffected OMGR The object definition resides on the page set The object is defined on the page set of the of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a comm
258. ing information for the process name ALTDATE The date on which the definition was last altered in the form yyyy mm dd ALTTIME The time at which the definition was last altered in the form hh mm ss APPLICID Application identifier APPLTYPE Application type DESCR Description ENVRDATA Environment data USERDATA User data See parameters 186 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference for more information about individual DISPLAY QMGR DISPLAY QMGR Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DISPLAY to display the queue manager parameters for this queue manager Synonym DIS DISPLAY QMGR r CMDSCOPE 3 DISPLAY QMGR 4 5 requested attrs ALL I CMDSCOPE qmgr name Requested attrs CMDSCOPE 5 Chapter 2 The commands 187 DISPLAY QMGR 1 ALTDATE 1 ALTTIME AUTHOREV CCSID 2 CHAD 1 CHADEV 1 CHADEXIT 1 CLWLEXIT 1 CLWLDATA 1 CLWLLEN CMDLEVEL COMMANDQ 3 CPILEVEL DEADQ DEFXMITQ DESCR 2 DISTL 3 160 3 IGQAUT 3 IGQUSER INHIBTEV F LOCALEV MAXHANDS MAXMSGL MAXPRTY 4 MAXUMSGS PERFMEV PLATFORM 1 QMID QMNAME 3 QSGNAME REMOTEEV 1 05
259. ion queue queue used by an application archive log See recovery log ASID Address space identifier asynchronous messaging A method of communication between programs in which programs place messages on message queues With asynchronous messaging the sending program proceeds with its own processing without waiting for a reply to its message Contrast with synchronous messaging attribute One of a set of properties that defines the characteristics of an object authorization checks Security checks that are performed when a user tries to issue administration commands against an object for example to open queue or connect to a queue manager authorization file In MOSeries on UNIX systems a file that provides security definitions for an object a class of objects or all classes of objects authorization service In MQSeries on UNIX systems for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT a service that provides authority checking of commands and MOI calls for the user identifier associated with the command or call authorized program analysis report APAR A report of a problem caused by a suspected defect in a current unaltered release of a program B backout An operation that reverses all the changes made during the current unit of recovery or unit of 291 Glossary work After the operation is complete a new unit of recovery or unit of work begins Contrast with commit
260. ion you want to display This can be a specific queue name or a generic queue name By using a generic queue name you can display either e queue definitions One or more queues that match the specified name generic q name The local name of the queue definition to be displayed see on page 4 A trailing asterisk 4 all eae with the specified stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk on its own specifies all queues The names must all be defined to the local queue manager ALL Specify this to cause all attributes to be displayed If this parameter is specified any attributes that are also requested specifically have no effect all attributes are still displayed On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT this is the default if you do not specify a generic name and do not request any specific attributes CFSTRUCT generic name This parameter is optional and limits the information displayed to those queues where the value of the coupling facility structure is specified in brackets The value can be a generic name If you do not enter a value for this parameter CFSTRUCT is treated as a requested parameter CLUSINFO This requests that in addition to information about attributes of queues defined on this queue manager information about these and other queues in the cluster that match the selection criteria is displayed In this case there might be multiple queues with th
261. is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group PURGE and NOPURGE Specifies whether or not any existing committed messages on the queue named by the DELETE command are to be purged for the delete command to work The default is NOPURGE NOPURGE The deletion is not to go ahead if there are any committed messages on the named queue PURGE The deletion is to go ahead even if there are committed messages on the named queue and these messages are also to be purged 146 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DELETE Queues OSGDISP Specifies the disposition of the object to which you are applying the command that is where it is defined and how it behaves If the object definition is shared you do not need to delete it on every queue manager that is part of a queue sharing group Queue sharing groups are available only on MOSeries for OS 390 COPY The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR is not affected by this command GROUP The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP GROUP An
262. is shared PRIVATE Clear only the private queue named q name The queue is private if it was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP COPY or QSGDISP QMGR This is the default value SHARED Clear only the shared queue named g name The queue is shared if it was defined using a command that had the parameters OSGDISP SHARED Note On Tandem NSK the command is unable to detect when uncommitted messages are being backed out from a queue and so you are recommended to verify that the queue files are not open before running the command For more information about clearing local queues on Tandem NSK see the MQSeries for Tandem NonStop Kernel System Management Guide Chapter 2 The commands 55 DEFINE BUFFPOOL DEFINE BUFFPOOL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DEFINE BUFFPOOL to define a buffer pool that is used for holding messages in main storage Note DEFINE BUFFPOOL can be issued only from the CSOINPI initialization data set Synonym DEF BP DEFINE BUFFPOOL r BUFFERS 1000 4 gt gt DEFINE BUFFPOOL buf pool id gt lt BUFFERS integer Parameter descriptions If this command is not issued the default number of buffers is assumed If more than one DEFINE BUFFPOOL command is issued for the same buffer pool only the last one is actioned buf pool id Buffer p
263. it event See channel event instrumentation event performance event and queue manager event event data In an event message the part of the message data that contains information about the event such as the queue manager name and the application that gave rise to the event See also event header event header In an event message the part of the message data that identifies the event type of the reason code for the event event log See application log event message Contains information such as the category of event the name of the application that caused the event and queue manager statistics relating to the origin of an instrumentation event in a network of MOSeries systems event queue The queue onto which the queue manager puts an event message after it detects an event Each category of event queue manager performance or channel event has its own event queue Event Viewer A tool provided by Windows NT to examine and manage log files extended specify task abnormal exit ESTAE An OS 390 macro that provides recovery capability and gives control to the specified exit routine for processing diagnosing an abend or specifying a retry address external security manager ESM security product that is invoked by the OS 390 System Authorization Facility RACF is an example of an ESM F FFST First Failure Support Technology FIFO First in first out 294 MOSC Comman
264. ith the same name Synonym REC BSDS RECOVER BSDS as the one that encountered the error and copying onto the new data set the contents of the BSDS that does not have an error CMDSCOPE I gt gt RECOVER BSDS Notes 1 Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 4r entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled 232 MQsSeries MQSC Command Reference REFRESH CLUSTER REFRESH CLUSTER Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use REFRESH CLUSTER to discard all locally held cluster information including any autodefined channels that are in doubt and force it to be rebuilt This enables you to perform a cold star
265. l DEFINE CHANNEL 1 DEFINE CHANNEL channel name CHLTYPE SVRCONN 5 2 3 r AUTOSTART DISABLED TRPTYPE DECNET LU62 5 4 AUTOSTART ENABLED NETBIOS 4 SPX 6 6 7 CMDSCOPE 8 I gt 10 pescR string 7 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name HBINT integer 10 L CMDSCOPE 6 6 r MAXMSGL 4 194 304 MCAUSER gt L ke Ceharibelisname MAXMSGL integer MCAUSER string 6 8 PUTAUT DEF QSGDISP QMGR 8 REPLACE 8 10 L PUTAUT ONLYMCA I 0SGDISP COPY 10 L QSGDISP GROUP 6 6 r RCVDATA 7 RCVEXIT 7 gt CJ CJ 9 9 RCVDATA string RCVEXIT string 6 6 6 SCYDATA SCYEXIT r SENDDATA gt SCYDATA string SCYEXIT string 1 9 L SENDDATA string 70 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference r SENDEXIT DEFINE CHANNEL 6 gt lt 9 SENDEXIT string Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 2 This is not mandatory on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT
266. l the parameters If this parameter is specified any parameters that are requested specifically have no effect all parameters are still displayed On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT this is the default if you do not specify a generic name and do not request any specific parameters On other platforms if no parameters are specified and the ALL parameter is not specified the default is that the process names are returned CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if OSGDISP is set to GROUP E The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group QSGDISP Specifies the disposition of the objects for which information is to be disp
267. lasses can be specified as m n for example CLASS 01 03 If you do not specify a class the default is to start class 1 Table 12 IFCID descriptions for IFCID trace events and classes Class IFCID Description Global trace 01 0000 Reserved for IBM service 02 0018 User parameter error detected in a control block 03 0016 User parameter error detected on entry to MQI Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 267 START TRACE Table 12 IFCID descriptions for IFCID trace events and classes continued Class IFCID Description 0017 User parameter error detected on exit from MOI 0018 User parameter error detected in a control block 04 Various Reserved for IBM service Statistics trace 01 0001 Subsystem statistics 0002 Queue manager statistics Accounting trace 01 0003 The CPU time spent processing MOI calls and a count of MOQPUT and calls 03 0025 Enhanced accounting and statistical data IFCID Reserved for IBM service RMID Introduces a list of specific resource managers for which trace information is gathered You cannot use this option for STAT or traces C Starts a trace for all resource managers This is the default integer The identifying number of any resource manager in Hable 13 You can use up to 8 of the allowed resource manager identifiers do not use the same one twice If the list of RMIDs includes 231 the tracing for this resource m
268. lated to the command the values are taken from the default definition for this object This is equivalent to specifying LIKE SYSTEMST This default storage class definition can be altered by your installation to the default values required The queue manager searches page set 0 for an object with the name you specify The disposition of the LIKE object is not copied to the object you are defining Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 1933 DEFINE STGCLASS Notes 1 QSGDISP GROUP objects are not searched 2 LIKE is ignored if OSGDISP COPY is specified NOREPLACE and REPLACE Whether the existing definition and with the same disposition is to be replaced with this one This is optional The default is NOREPLACE Any object with a different disposition is not changed NOREPLACE The definition should not replace any existing definition of the same name REPLACE The definition should replace any existing definition of the same name If a definition does not exist one is created If you use the REPLACE option all queues that use this storage class must be empty PSID integer The page set identifier that this storage class is to be associated with If you do not specify this the value is taken from the default storage class SYSTEMST Note No check is made that the page set has been defined an error will be raised only when you try to put a message to a queue that specifies this storage class MORC PAGE
269. layable characters The maximum length is 64 characters In a DBCS installation it can contain DBCS characters subject to a maximum length of 64 bytes Note If characters are used that are not in the coded character set identifier CCSID for this queue manager they might be translated incorrectly if the information is sent to another queue manager DISCINT integer The minimum time in seconds for which the channel waits for a message to arrive on the transmission queue after a batch ends before terminating the channel A value of zero causes the message channel agent to wait indefinitely The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR HBINT integer This parameter has a different interpretation depending upon the channel type as follows e For a channel type of SDR SVR RCVR RQSTR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR this is the time in seconds between heartbeat flows passed from the sending MCA when there are no messages on the transmission queue The heartbeat exchange gives the receiving MCA the opportunity to quiesce the channel This type of heartbeat is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Note You should set this value to be significantly less than the value of DISCINT MQSeries checks only that it is within the permitted range however
270. layed Values are LIVE This is the default value and displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY ALL Displays information for objects defined with OSGDISP OMGR or QSGDISP COPY Chapter 2 The commands 185 DISPLAY PROCESS COPY GROUP PRIVATE If there is shared queue manager environment and the command is being executed on the queue manager where it was issued this option also displays information for objects defined with OSGDISP GROUD If OSGDISP LIVE is specified or defaulted or if QSGDISP ALL is specified in a shared queue manager environment the command might give duplicated names with different dispositions Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP COPY Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP GROUP This is allowed only if there is a shared queue manager environment Display information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY Note that QSGDISP PRIVATE displays the same information as QSGDISP LIVE Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR QSGDISP displays one of the following values if it is specified or if there is a shared queue manager environment GROUP COPY The object was defined with QSGDISP QMGR The object was defined with OSGDISP GROUP The object was defined with QSGDISP COPY Requested parameters You can request the follow
271. lity SRV serviceability routine designed for for problem diagnosis See l START TRACE an page 265 for a list of allowed destinations for each trace type Constraint block CLASS nteger Limits the list to traces started for particular classes See for a list of allowed classes The default is CLASS which does not limit the list RMID integer Limits the list to traces started for particular resource managers See START TRACE on page 265 for a list of allowed resource manager identifiers Do not use this option with STAT The default is RMID which does not limit the list Note Information about RMID 231 might be inaccurate if the trace has been altered using the ALTER TRACE command or if the channel initiator has been stopped TNO integer Limits the list to particular traces identified by their trace number 1 to 32 Up to 8 trace numbers can be used If more than one number is used only one value for USERID can be used The default is TNO which does not limit the list USERID string Limits the list to traces started for particular user IDs Up to 8 user IDs can be used If more than one user ID is used only one value can be used for TNO Do not use this option with STAT The default is USERID which does not limit the list 222 MQSC Command Reference DISPLAY USAGE DISPLAY USAGE Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGI
272. lly allowed for MOSeries object names see for naming SCOPE Specifies the scope of the queue definition This parameter is supported only on alias local and remote queues QMGR The queue definition has queue manager scope This means that the definition of the queue does not extend beyond the queue manager that owns it To open the queue for output from some other queue manager either the name of the owning queue manager must be specified or the other queue manager must have a local definition of the queue CELL The queue definition has cell scope This means that the queue is known to all of the queue managers in the cell and can be opened for output merely by specifying the name of the queue the name of the queue manager that owns the queue need not be specified If there is already a queue with the same name in the cell directory the command fails The REPLACE option has no effect on this This value is valid only if a name service supporting a cell directory for example the supplied DCE name service has been configured This parameter is valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp UNIX systems and Windows NT SHARE and NOSHARE Whether multiple applications can get messages from this queue This parameter is supported only on local and model queues NOSHARE A single application instance only can get messages from the queue SHARE More than one application instance can get messages from the queue
273. luding 72 characters A line must not end in a keyboard control character for example a tab If the last nonblank character a line is Aminus sign this indicates that the command is to be continued from the start of the next line A plus sign this indicates that the command is to be continued from the first nonblank character in the next line If you use to continue a command remember to leave at least one blank before the next parameter except on OS 390 where this is not necessary Either of these can occur within a parameter data value or quoted string For example Fr ed and Fr ed where the of the second line of the second example is the first position of the line are both equivalent to Fred MQSC commands that are contained within an Escape PCF Programmable Command Format command cannot be continued in this way The entire command must be contained within a single Escape command For information about the PCF commands see the MQSerie manual e and values used at the ends of lines are discarded when the command is reassembled into a single string On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can use a semicolon character to terminate a command even if you have entered a character at the end of the previous line You can also use the semicolon in the same way on OS 390 for commands issued from the CSQUTIL batch utility prog
274. luster for which availability is to be resumed CLUSNL ulname The name of the namelist specifying a list of clusters for which availability is to be resumed CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled 250 MQSC Command Reference RVERIFY SECURITY RVERIFY SECURITY Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use RVERIFY SECURITY to set a reverification flag for all specified users The user is reverified the next time that security is checked for that user Synonym REV SEC Note REVERIFY SECURITY is another synonym for RVERIFY SECURITY RVERIFY SECURITY CMDSCOPE gt gt RVERIFY SECURITY XUuserid gt lt CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions use
275. ly for objects defined with QSGDISP COPY GROUP Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP GROUP This is allowed only if there is a shared queue manager environment PRIVATE Display information for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY Note that QSGDISP PRIVATE displays the same information as QSGDISP LIVE QMGR Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR QSGDISP displays one of the following values if it is specified or if there is a shared queue manager environment The object was defined with QSGDISP QMGR GROUP The object was defined with OSGDISP GROUP COPY The object was defined with QSGDISP COPY Requested parameters You can request the following information for each namelist definition ALTDATE The date on which the definition was last altered in the form yyyy mm dd ALTTIME The time at which the definition was last altered in the form hh mm ss DESCR Description NAMCOUNT Number of names in the list NAMES List of names See for more information about the DESCR and NAMES parameters Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 183 DISPLAY PROCESS DISPLAY PROCESS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DISPLAY PROCESS to display the attributes of one or more processes Synonym DIS PRO DISPLAY PROCESS gt gt DISPLAY
276. ly on OS 390 Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT Valid only on AIX Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions For a description of the parameters see Chapter 2 The commands 27 ALTER NAMELIST ALTER NAMELIST Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS d Dd Use ALTER NAMELIST to alter a list of names This is most commonly a list of cluster names or queue names Notes 1 Synonym ALT NL ALTER NAMELIST r CMDSCOPE 7 On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris gt lt gt gt ALTER NAMELIST name L pescr string 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP QMGR 2 QSGDISP COPY 1 NAMES QSGDISP GROUP pem __QSGDISP PRIVATE Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on for OS 390 2 Valid only on OS 390 28 MQSC Command Reference Parameter descriptions For a description of the parameters see ALTER PROCESS ALTER PROCESS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGI
277. m If you use this parameter to change the CCSID applications that are running when the change is applied continue to use the original CCSID Because of this you must stop and restart all running applications before you continue This includes the command server and channel programs To do this stop and restart the queue manager after making the change This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris Tandem NSK and Windows NT See the for details of the supported CCSIDs for each platform Whether receiver and server connection channels can be defined automatically DISABLED Auto definition is not used This is the queue manager s initial default value ENABLED Auto definition is used Cluster sender channels can always be defined automatically regardless of the setting of this parameter This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CHADEV Whether channel auto definition events are generated DISABLED Auto definition events are not generated This is the queue manager s initial default value ENABLED Auto definition events are generated 32 MQSC Command Reference ALTER QMGR This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX 05 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CHADEXIT string Auto definition exit name If this name is nonblank the exit is called when an inbound request for an undefined receiver server conn
278. m NSK this is the CPU ID and PID displayed in hexadecimal Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 165 DISPLAY CHSTATUS This information is not available on OS 390 The parameter is ignored if specified HBINT The heartbeat interval being used for this session LONGRTS Number of long retry wait start attempts left This applies only to sender or server channels LSTMSGDA Date when the last message was sent or MOI call was handled see LSTMSCTI LSTMSGTI Time when the last message was sent or MOI call was handled For a sender or server this is the time the last message the last part of it if it was split was sent For a requester or receiver it is the time the last message was put to its target queue For a server connection channel it is the time when the last MOI call completed MAXMSGL The maximum message length being used for this session valid only on OS 390 MCASTAT Whether the Message Channel Agent is currently running This is either running or not running Note that it is possible for a channel to be in stopped state but for the program still to be running This information is not available on OS 390 The parameter is ignored if specified MSGS Number of messages sent or received or for server connection channels the number of MOI calls handled during this session since the channel was started NPMSPEED The nonpersistent message handling technique being used for this session SHORTRTS Numb
279. mand is actually run Therefore it is important that channel definitions are consistent Inconsistent channel definitions might result in unexpected command behavior named queue manager Not permitted active queue managers Not permitted FIXSHARED Ping a shared channel on the local queue manager Ping a shared channel on the named queue manager Not permitted 230 DATALEN integer The length of the data in the range 16 through 32 768 This is optional MOQSeries MOSC Command Reference PING QMGR PING QMGR Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use PING to test whether the queue manager is responsive to commands Note If commands are issued to the queue manager by sending messages to the command server queue this command causes a special message to be sent to it consisting of a command header only and checking that a positive reply is returned Synonym PING OMGR PING QMGR gt gt PING QMGR 4 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 231 RECOVER BSDS RECOVER BSDS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use RECOVER BSDS to reestablish a dual bootstrap data set BSDS after one has been disabled by a data set error Note Command processing consists of allocating a data set w
280. mation for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY If there is a shared queue manager environment and the command is being executed on the queue manager where it was issued this option also displays information for objects defined with QSGDISP GROUP If QSGDISP ALL is specified in a shared queue manager environment the command might give duplicated names with different dispositions Note In the QSGDISP LIVE case this occurs only where a shared and a nonshared queue have the same name such a situation should not occur in a well managed system In a shared queue manager environment use DISPLAY CHANNEL name CMDSCOPE QSGDISP ALL to list ALL objects matching name Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 153 DISPLAY CHANNEL in the queue sharing group without duplicating those in the shared repository COPY Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP COPY GROUP Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP GROUP This is allowed only if there is a shared queue manager environment PRIVATE Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR or QSGDISP COPY Note that QSGDISP PRIVATE displays the same information as OSGDISP LIVE OMGR Display information only for objects defined with QSGDISP QMGR QSGDISP displays one of the following values if it is specified or if there is a shared queue manager environment QMGR The object was defined with QSGDISP QMGR
281. me disposition is to be replaced with this one This is optional The default is NOREPLACE Any object with a different disposition is not changed NOREPLACE The definition should not replace any existing definition of the same name REPLACE The definition should replace any existing definition of the same name If a definition does not exist one is created USERDATA string A character string that contains user information pertaining to the application defined in the APPLICID that is to be started The maximum length is 128 characters The meaning of USERDATA is determined by the trigger monitor application The trigger monitor provided by MOSeries simply passes Chapter 2 The commands 103 DEFINE PROCESS USERDATA to the started application as part of the parameter list The parameter list consists of the MOTMC2 structure containing USERDATA followed by one blank followed by ENVRDATA with trailing blanks removed For message channel agents the format of this field is a channel name of up to 20 characters See the manual for information about what these need as APPLICID On Tandem NSK a character string containing spaces must be enclosed in double quotation marks 104 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference DEFINE PSID DEFINE PSID Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DEFINE PSID
282. meter is supported only on remote queues If this definition is used for a local definition of a remote queue RNAME must not be blank when the open occurs If this definition is used for a queue manager alias definition RNAME must be blank when the open occurs If this definition is used for reply to alias this name is the name of the queue that is to be the reply to queue The name is not checked to ensure that it contains only those characters ROMNAMEBE string The name of the remote queue manager on which the queue RNAME is defined This parameter is supported only on remote queues f an application opens the local definition of a remote queue ROMNAME must not be blank or the name of the local queue manager When the open occurs if XMITO is blank there must be a local queue of this name which is to be used as the transmission queue f this definition is used for a queue manager alias ROMNAME is the name of the queue manager that is being aliased It can be the name of the local queue manager Otherwise then if XMITO is blank when the open occurs there must be a local queue of this name which is to be used as the transmission queue f this definition is used for a reply to alias this name is the name of the queue manager that is to be the reply to queue manager Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 127 Define queues The name is not checked to ensure that it contains only those characters norma
283. mission queue and moves them over a communication link to a receiver or requester channel sequential delivery In MQSeries a method of transmitting messages with a sequence number so that the receiving channel can reestablish the message sequence when storing the messages This is required where messages must be delivered only once and in the correct order sequential number wrap value In method of ensuring that both ends of a communication link reset their current message sequence numbers at the same time Transmitting messages with a sequence Glossary of terms and abbreviations 299 Glossary number ensures that the receiving channel can reestablish the message sequence when storing the messages server 1 In MOSeries a queue manager that provides queue services to client applications running on a remote workstation 2 The program that responds to requests for information in the particular two program information flow model of client server See also client server channel In message queuing a channel that responds to a requester channel removes messages from a transmission queue and moves them over a communication link to the requester channel server connection channel type The type of MOI channel definition associated with the server that runs a queue manager See also client connection channel type service interval A time interval against which the elapsed time between a put or a get
284. ms Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DISPLAY SECURITY to display the current settings for the security parameters Synonym DIS SEC DISPLAY SECURITY gt gt DISPLAY SECURITY Requested attrs ALL r CMDSCOPE 7 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 L CMDSCOPE requested attrs Notes y em SWITCHES L TIMEQUT 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSOINPI 4r entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 213 DISPLAY SECURITY command is executed the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in
285. n for OS 390 236 MOSC Command Reference RESET CHANNEL Parameter descriptions channel name The name of the channel to be reset This is required CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group If CHLDISP is set to SHARED CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager Ea The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled CHLDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only and can take the values of PRIVATE SHARED In conjunction with the various values of the CMDSCOPE parameter this parameter controls two types of channel SHARED A receiving channel is shared if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue sharing group A sending channel is shared if its transmission queue has a disposition of SHARED PRIVATE A receiving channel is private if it was started in response to an inbound transmission directed to the queue manager A sending channel is private if its transmission queue has a disposition other than SHARED Note This
286. n MOI call has ended configuration file In MOSeries on UNIX systems MOSeries for AS 400 MOSeries for OS 2 Warp and for Windows NT a file that contains configuration information related to for example logs communications or installable services Synonymous with ini file See also stanza connect To provide a queue manager connection handle which an application uses on subsequent MOI calls The connection is made either by the MOCONN or MOCONNX call or automatically by the MOOPEN call connection handle The identifier or token by which a program accesses the queue manager to which it is connected context Information about the origin of a message context security In MOSeries a method of allowing security to be handled such that messages are obliged to carry details of their origins in the message descriptor control command In MQSeries on UNIX systems for OS 2 Warp and MOSeries for Windows NT a command that can be entered interactively from the operating system command line Such a command requires only that the MOSeries product be installed it does not require a special utility or program to run it control interval CI A fixed length area of direct access storage in which VSAM stores records and creates distributed free spaces The control interval is the unit of information that VSAM transmits to or from direct access storage Control Language CL In MOSeries for AS
287. n about active and in doubt threads Threads shown as in doubt on one invocation of this command will probably be resolved for subsequent invocations Synonym DIS THD DISPLAY THREAD r CMDSCOPE DISPLAY THREAD gt 1 t CMDSCOPE qmgr name Yconnect ion name 1 CMDSCOPE TYPE ACTIVE gt gt lt TYPE INDOUBT QMNAME Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter d escriptions connection name List of one or more connection names of 1 through 8 characters each For batch connections this name is the batch job name For CICS connections this name is the CICS applid For IMS connections this name is the IMS job name For TSO connections this name is the TSO user ID For RRS connections this is RRSBATCH Threads are selected from the address spaces associated with these connections only Displays threads associated with all connections to A connection name or must be used no default is available CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 ie The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value 218 MQSeries MQSC Comma
288. n added to all Commands except DEFINE BUFFPOOL DEFINE PSID DISPLAY CMDSERV DISPLAY GROUP START CMDSERV START OMGR STOP CMDSERV CHLDISP This parameter has been added to the following commands DISPLAY CHSTATUS PING CHANNEL RESET CHANNEL RESOLVE CHANNEL START CHANNEL STOP CHANNEL QSGDISP This parameter has been added to the ALTER DELETE DEFINE and DISPLAY commands for Channels Namelists Processes Queues Storage classes Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 ix Changes Changes for the previous edition SC33 1369 12 The thirteenth edition was not published Changes for the twelth edition SC33 1369 11 This edition included the following new product releases for AS 400 V5 1 for Tandem NonStop Kernel V2 2 0 1 and the following new product for Digital UNIX Compaq Tru64 UNIX V2 2 1 Changes for the eleventh edition SC33 1369 10 This edition included the following additions Queue manager clusters were added to the following products MOSeries for AIX V5 1 MOSeries for HP UX V5 1 for OS 2 Warp V5 1 MOsSeries for OS 390 V2 1 MOSeries for Sun Solaris V5 1 MOSeries for Windows NT V5 1 The following Queue M
289. n be changed to NONE MSGID or CORRELID at any time and the change takes effect immediately if all the following conditions are satisfied No applications have the queue open The queue is empty There are no uncommitted MOPUT or MOGET calls outstanding against the queue If these conditions are not satisfied the parameter is changed immediately but the index is not rebuilt until the next time the queue manager is restarted The reply sent by the queue manager indicates if this is the case This parameter be changed to MSGTOKEN only when there are no messages on the queue If you attempt to change this parameter to MSGTOKEN while there are messages on the queue the command fails For local queues defined with a disposition of SHARED the INDXTYPE parameter can be changed to NONE MSGID or CORRELID only if all the following conditions are satisfied If these conditions are not satisfied the command fails No applications have the queue open The queue is empty There are no uncommitted MOPUT or MOGET operations outstanding against the queue This parameter is supported only on OS 390 On other platforms retrieval optimization might be provided but it is not controlled by a queue parameter INITO string The local name of a local queue known as the initiation queue on this queue manager to which trigger messages relating to this queue are written See Ru This parameter is supported only on local an
290. n to another queue The queue to which the alias refers must be another local or remote queue defined at this queue manager It cannot be another alias queue Synonym DEF QA DEFINE QALIAS rCMDSCOPE 7 4 DEFINE QALIAS q name gt 5 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 5 L CMDSCOPE r QSGDISP QMGR 4 5 define attrs common q attrs I QSGDISP COPY 1 7 5 L QSGDISP GROUP gt lt alias q attrs H Define attrs NOREPLACE LIKE qal E REPLACE Common q attrs 106 MOSC Command Reference DEFINE QUEUES 1 1 1 DEFPRTY 0 DEFPSIST NO DESCR 7 gt L DEFPRTY integer fenem LDESCR string 1 PUT ENABLED L PUT DISABLED Alias q attrs 1 2 1 2 r CLUSNL CLUSTER gt 2 2 CLUSNL nlname CLUSTER clustername 1 2 1 1 3 DEFBIND OPEN GET ENABLED SCOPE QMGR gt gt 2 GET DISABLED 3 L DEFBIND NOTFIXED SCOPE CELL 1 rTARGQC 7 gt TARGQ string Notes 1 This is the default supplied with but your installation might have changed it 2 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 3 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS
291. nager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group DESCR string Plain text comment It provides descriptive information about the namelist when an issues the DISELAY NAMELIST command see It should contain only displayable characters The maximum length is 64 characters In a DBCS installation it can contain DBCS characters subject to a maximum length of 64 bytes Note If characters are used that are not in the coded character set identifier CCSID for this queue manager they might be translated incorrectly if the information is sent to another queue manager LIKE namelist name The name of a namelist whose parameters will be used to model this definition This parameter applies only to the DEFINE NAMELIST command If this field is not filled in and you do not complete the parameter fields related to the command the values are taken from the default definition for namelists on this queue manager 96 MOSeries MQSC Command Reference This is equivalent to specifying LIKE SYSTEM DEFAULT NAMELIST DEFINE NAMELIST A default namelist definition is provided but it can be altered by the installation to the default values required See On for OS 390 the queue manager searches page set 0 for an object with the name you specify The disposition of the LIKE object is not copied to the object you are de
292. name must be specified for the TPNAME and MODENAME parameters otherwise these parameters must be blank Note For client connection channels only the first form is allowed Symbolic name The symbolic destination name for the logical unit information for the queue manager as defined in the side information data set The TPNAME and MODENAME parameters must be blank Note For cluster receiver channels the side information is on the other queue managers in the cluster Alternatively in this case it can be a name that a channel auto definition exit can resolve into the appropriate logical unit information for the local queue manager The specified or implied LU name can be that of a VTAM generic resources group On OS 2 Warp it is the fully qualified name of the partner LU or an LU alias On OS 400 Windows NT and UNIX systems this is the name of the CPI C communications side object or if the TPNAME is not blank this is the fully qualified name of the partner logical unit See the information about configuration parameters for an LU 6 2 connection for your platform in the Moseried manual for more information On Tandem the value of this depends on whether SNAX or ICE is used as the communications protocol If SNAX is used For sender requester and fully qualified server channels this is the process name of the SNAX APC process the name of the local LU and the name of the partner LU on the remote mac
293. nd shared channels on the named queue manager status for current private and shared channels on all active queue managers Table 3 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for DISPLAY CHSTATUS SHORT CHLDISP CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE qmgr name CMDSCOPE CMDSCOPE local qmgr PRIVATE STATUS and short status for STATUS and short status for STATUS and short status for current private channels current private channels on current private channels on the local queue manager the named queue manager all active queue managers SHARED STATUS and short status for Not permitted Not permitted current shared channels on all active queue managers in the queue sharing group ALL STATUS and short status for STATUS and short status for STATUS and short status for current private channels current private channels on current private and shared the local queue manager and the named queue manager channels on all active queue current shared channels in managers in the the queue sharing group queue sharing group ll Note 1 In this case you get two separate sets of responses to the command on the queue manager where it was entered one for PRIVATE and one for SHARED Table 4 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for DISPLAY CHSTATUS SAVED CHLDISP CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE qmgr name CMDSCOPE CMDSCOPE local qmgr PRIVATE Common status for saved Common status for saved Common status for saved private channels
294. nd Reference DISPLAY THREAD command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group TYPE type of thread to display This parameter is optional ACTIVE Display only active threads An active thread is one for which a unit of recovery has started but not completed Resources are held in MQSeries on its behalf This is the default if TYPE is omitted INDOUBT Display only in doubt threads An in doubt thread is one that is in the second phase of the two phase commit operation Resources are held in on its behalf External intervention is needed to resolve the status of in doubt threads You might only have to start the recovery coordinator CICS IMS or RRS or you might need to do more They might have been in doubt at the last restart or they might have become in doubt since the last restart REGIONS Display a summary of active threads for each active connection Note Threads used
295. nd comments to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you You can send your comments to IBM in any of the following ways By mail to this address User Technologies Department MP095 IBM United Kingdom Laboratories Hursley Park WINCHESTER Hampshire SO21 2JN United Kingdom By fax From outside the U K after your international access code use 44 1962 870229 From within the U K use 01962 870229 Electronically use the appropriate network ID BM Mail Exchange GBIBM2Q9 at IBMMAIL BMLink HURSLEY IDRCF Internet idrcf hursley ibm com Whichever method you use ensure that you include The publication title and order number The topic to which your comment applies Your name and address telephone number fax number network ID O Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 313 314 MOSC Command Reference Printed the United States of America recycled paper containing 10 recovered post consumer fiber C33 1369 13 YOON ON a 99S OIN uorjeuuojuL aULdS
296. nd is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 239 RESET CLUSTER You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled OMNAME qmname The name of the queue manager to be forcibly removed 240 MOSC Command Reference RESET QSTATS RESET QSTATS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use RESET QSTATS to report performance data for queue and then to reset that data Synonym None r CMDSCOPE RESET QSTATS generic q name gt lt 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions generic q name The name of the local queue with a disposition of OMGR COPY or SHARED but not GROUP whose performance data is to be reset A trailing asterisk matches all queues with the specified stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk on its own specifies all queues The names must all be defined to the local queue m
297. nderstand this book How to use this book Summary of changes Changes for this edition 5 33 1369 43 Changes for the previous edition SC33 1369 12 Changes for the twelth edition SC33 1369 11 Changes for the eleventh edition SC33 1369 10 Chapter 1 Using MQSeries commands Rules for using MQSeries commands Characters with special meanings Building command scripts Rules for naming MOSeries objects Queue names Other object names How to read syntax diagrams Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands ALTER CHANNEL Sender channel Server channel Receiver channel Requester channel Client connection channel Server connection channel Cluster sender channel Cluster receiver channel Parameter descriptions ALTER NAMELIST Parameter descriptions ALTER PROCESS Parameter descriptions ALTER QMGR Parameter descriptions ALTER Queues ALTER QALIAS ALTER QLOCAL ALTER QMODEL ALTER QREMOTE Parameter descriptions ALTER SECURITY Parameter descriptions ALTER STGCLASS Parameter descriptions ALTER TRACE Parameter descriptions ARCHIVE LOG Parameter descriptions Usage notes Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 V VII vii vii vii SO 10 11 13 15 17 20 22 24 26 27 28 28 29 29 30 sol 39 39 41 43 45 45 46 46 48 48 49 49 51 51 52 CLEAR OLOCAL Parameter de
298. necessary to issue the 5 CANCEL command to terminate This option does not deregister from ARM so the queue manager is eligible for immediate automatic restart STOP TRACE STOP TRACE Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Parameter descriptions Use STOP TRACE to stop tracing Synonym There is no synonym for this command STOP TRACE r CMDSCOPE gt 5 TRACE ACCTG GLOBAL 1 v destination block H STAT CMDSCOPE qmgr name Lx constraint block COMMENT string Destination block I bEST 2 GTF SMF SRV Constraint block CLASS RMID TNO CLASS integer RMID integer TNO integer r USERID gt USERID string Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Each option that you use limits the effect of the command to active traces that were started using the same option either explicitly or by default with exactly the same parameter values Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 281 STOP TRACE You must specify a trace type or an asterisk STOP TRACE stops all active traces The trace types are ACCTG Accounting data the synonym is A Note Accounting data can be l
299. ned when APPLTYPE has the value SYSTEM Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 199 DISPLAY QUEUE DISPLAY QUEUE Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DISPLAY QUEUE to display the attributes of one or more queues of any type Notes On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can use the following commands or their synonyms as an alternative way to display these attributes 1 DISPLAY OALIAS DISPLAY OCLUSTER DISPLAY OLOCAL DISPLAY OMODEL DISPLAY OREMOTE These commands produce the same output as the DISPLAY QUEUE TYPE queue type command If you enter the commands this way do not use the TYPE parameter because this causes an error On OS 390 the channel initiator must be running before you can display information about cluster queues using TYPE OCLUSTER or the CLUSINFO parameter Synonym DIS DISPLAY QUEUE gt gt DISPLAY QUEUE generic q name 2 CFSTRUCT ALL mtm 1 CLUSTER CLUSINFO 1 generic name rCMDSCOPE 4 2 CLUSNL 5 1 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name generic name 5 L CMDSCOPE 200 MOSC Command Reference 5 QSGDISP LIVE 2 DISPLAY QUEUE I QSGDISP ALL I QSGDISP QMGR I QSGDISP COPY
300. ng the provision of services to enable applications to put messages on queues belonging to other queue managers reply message A type of message used for replies to request messages Contrast with request message and report message reply to queue The name of a queue to which the program that issued an MOPUT call wants a reply message or report message sent report message type of message that gives information about another message A report message can indicate that a message has been delivered has arrived at its destination has expired or could not be processed for some reason Contrast with reply message and request message requester channel In message queuing a channel that may be started remotely by a sender channel The requester channel accepts messages from the sender channel over a communication link and puts the messages on the local queue designated in the message See also server channel request message A type of message used to request a reply from another program Contrast with reply message and report message RESLEVEL In for OS 390 an option that controls the number of CICS user IDs checked for API resource security in MOSeries for OS 390 resolution path The set of queues that are opened when an application specifies an alias or a remote queue on input to an MOOPEN call resource Any facility of the computing system or operating system required by a job or task In MQSeries
301. ng group to notify them of this clustered shared queue object is defined in the shared repository Messages are stored in the Coupling Facility and are available to any queue manager in the queue sharing group You can specify SHARED only if CFSTRUCT is nonblank INDXTYPE is not MSGTOKEN The queue is not one of the following SYSTEM CHANNEL INITO SYSTEM CHANNEL REPLY INFO SYSTEM CHANNEL SEQNO SYSTEM CHANNEL COMMAND SYSTEM COMMAND INPUT If the queue is clustered a command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the queue sharing group to notify them of this clustered shared queue OSVCIEV Controls whether Service Interval High or Service Interval OK events are generated This parameter is supported only on local and model queues and has no effect if it is specified on a shared queue Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 125 Define queues A Service Interval High event is generated when a check indicates that no messages have been retrieved from the queue for at least the time indicated by the OSVCINT parameter A Service Interval OK event is generated when a check indicates that messages have been retrieved from the queue within the time indicated by the OSVCINT parameter Note The value of this parameter can change implicitly For more information see the description of the Service Interval High and Service Interval OK events in the book HIGH Service Interval High events are
302. nimum strings DEFI is not a valid synonym for DEFINE Note There is no synonym for the DELETE parameter This is to avoid accidental deletion of objects when using DEF the synonym for DEFINE Characters with special meanings The following characters have special meaning when you build MOSC commands Blanks are used as separators Multiple blanks are equivalent to a single blank except in strings that have quotation marks 7 round them A Commas are used as separators Multiple commas are equivalent to a single comma except in strings that have quotation marks 7 round them A single quotation mark indicates the beginning or end of a string MQSeries leaves all characters that have quotation marks round them exactly as they are entered The containing quotation marks are not included when calculating the length of the string Two quotation marks together inside a string are treated by MOSeries as one quotation mark and the string is not terminated The double quotation marks are treated as one character when calculating the length of the string An open parenthesis indicates the beginning of a parameter list A close parenthesis indicates the end of a parameter list A colon indicates an inclusive range For example 1 5 means 1 2 3 4 5 This notation can be used only in TRACE commands An asterisk means all For example DISPLAY means display all traces and DISPLAY QUEUE PAY
303. nitiator must be running 2 This command can be issued to a channel of any type except SVRCONN and CLNTCONN channels including those that have been defined automatically However if it is issued to a sender server or cluster sender channel then in addition to resetting the value at the end at which the command is issued the value at the other receiver requester or cluster receiver end is also reset to the same value the next time this channel is initiated and resynchronized if necessary 3 If the command is issued to a receiver requester or cluster receiver channel the value at the other end is riot reset as well this must be done separately if necessary 4 Where there is both a locally defined channel and an auto defined cluster sender channel of the same name the command applies to the locally defined channel If there is no locally defined channel but more than one auto defined cluster sender channel the command applies to the channel that was last added to the local queue manager s repository Synonym RESET CHL RESET CHANNEL FCMDSCOPE 7 3 1 RESET CHANNEL channel name gt 2 CMDSCOPE qmgr name CHLDISP PRIVATE 1 SEQNUM 1 gt lt 2 SEQNUM integer L CHLDISP SHARED Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only o
304. object is defined on the page set of the of the queue manager that executes the queue manager that executes the command command The object was defined using a using the QSGDISP GROUP object of the command that had the parameters same name as the LIKE object OSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using For local queues messages are stored on the a command that had the parameters page sets of each queue manager and are QSGDISP QMGR is not affected by this available only through that queue manager command 124 MOSC Command Reference Define queues QSGDISP ALTER DEFINE GROUP The object definition resides in the shared The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a repository This is allowed only if there is a command that had the parameters shared queue manager environment If the QSGDISP GROUP Any object residing on definition is successful the following the page set of the queue manager that command is generated and sent to all active executes the command except a local copy queue managers to cause them to make or of the object or any object defined using refresh local copies on page set 0 command that had the parameters DEFINE QUEUE name REPLACE QSGDISP COPY OSGDISP SHARED is not affected by this command If the command is successful the following command is generated and sent to all
305. of the commands is shown in Chapter 2 The MQSeried Rules for using MQSeries commands You should observe the following rules when using commands Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 Each command starts with a primary parameter a verb and this is followed by a secondary parameter a noun This is then followed by the name or generic name of the object in parentheses if there is one which there is on most commands Following that parameters can usually occur in any order if a parameter has a corresponding value the value must occur directly after the parameter to which it relates Note On 05 390 the secondary parameter does not have to be second Keywords parentheses and values can be separated by any number of blanks and commas comma shown in the syntax diagrams can always be replaced by one or more blanks There must be at least one blank immediately preceding each parameter after the primary parameter except on OS 390 Any number of blanks can occur at the beginning or end of the command and between parameters punctuation and values For example the following command is valid ALTER QLOCAL Account TRIGDPTH 1 Blanks within a pair of quotation marks are significant Additional commas can appear anywhere where blanks are allowed and are treated as if they were blanks unless of course they are inside quoted strings Repeated parameters are not allowed Repeating a parameter with its
306. ommand Reference signaling In MOSeries for OS 390 and MOSeries for Windows 2 1 a feature that allows the operating system to notify a program when an expected message arrives on a queue single logging A method of recording MOSeries for OS 390 activity where each change is recorded one data set only Contrast with dual logging single phase backout A method in which an action in progress must not be allowed to finish and all changes that are part of that action must be undone single phase commit A method in which a program can commit updates to a queue without coordinating those updates with updates the program has made to resources controlled by another resource manager Contrast with two phase commit SIT System initialization table stanza A group of lines in a configuration file that assigns a value to a parameter modifying the behavior of a queue manager client or channel In MQSeries on UNIX systems MOSeries for OS 2 Warp and MOGeries for Windows NT a configuration ini file may contain a number of stanzas storage class In MOSeries for OS 390 a storage class defines the page set that is to hold the messages for a particular queue The storage class is specified when the queue is defined store and forward The temporary storing of packets messages or frames in a data network before they are retransmitted toward their destination subsystem In OS 390 a group of modules that provides function tha
307. one syncpoint It does not apply to messages that are put or retrieved outside syncpoint The number includes any trigger messages and report messages generated within the same unit of recovery Specify a value in the range 1 through 999 999 999 This parameter is not supported on OS 390 See the DEFINE MAXSMSGS command instead PERFMEV Whether performance related events are generated ENABLED Performance related events are generated DISABLED Performance related events are not generated This is the queue manager s initial default value Note On MOSeries for OS 390 all the queue managers in a queue sharing group should have the same setting REMOTEEV Whether remote error events are generated ENABLED Remote error events are generated DISABLED Remote error events are not generated This is the queue manager s initial default value REPOS clustername The name of a cluster for which this queue manager is to provide a repository manager service The maximum length is 48 characters conforming to the rules for naming objects No more than one of the resultant values of REPOS can be nonblank This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT REPOSNL ilname The name of a namelist of clusters for which this queue manager is to provide a repository manager service No more than one of the resultant values of REPOSNL can be nonblank Chapter 2 The MO
308. only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled i The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also assed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group P Ty q 8 q B group 148 MQSC Command Reference DELETE STGCLASS The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group OSGDISP Specifies the disposition of the object to which you are applying the command that is where it is defined and how it behaves COPY The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using a command that had the parameters QBGDISP OMGB is not affected by this command GROUP The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP GROUP Any object residing on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command except a local copy of the object is not affected by this command If the command is successful the following command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the queue sharing group to cause them to delete local copies on page set 0 DELETE STGCLASS name QSGDISP COPY QMGR The object definition resides on the page set of the qu
309. ool identifier This is required This is an integer in the range 0 through 3 BUFFERS integer The number of 4096 byte buffers to be used in this buffer pool This is optional The default number of buffers is 1000 and the minimum is 100 The maximum number of buffers for all the buffer pools is determined by the amount of storage available in the MQSeries address space See the IMOSerie for guidance on the number of buffers you can define in each buffer pool 56 MOSeries MOSC Command Reference DEFINE CHANNEL DEFINE CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DEFINE CHANNEL to define new channel and set its parameters Notes 1 On OS 390 this is valid only for channels used for distributed queuin without CICS If n are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual 2 For cluster sender channels you can only specify the REPLACE option for channels that have been created manually Synonym DEF CHL There is a separate syntax diagram for each type of channel Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 57 DEFINE CHANNEL Sender channel DEFINE CHANNEL 1 3 4 DEFINE CHANNEL channel nam
310. osoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and or other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Other company product or service names may be the trademarks or service marks of others Appendix Notices 289 290 MOQsSeries MOSC Command Reference Glossary of terms and abbreviations This glossary defines MQSeries terms and abbreviations used in this book If you do not find the term you are looking for see the Index or the IBM Dictionary of Computing New York McGraw Hill 1994 This glossary includes terms and definitions from the American National Dictionary for Information Systems ANSI X3 172 1990 copyright 1990 by the American National Standards Institute ANSI Copies may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute 11 West 42 Street New York New York 10036 Definitions are identified by the symbol A after the definition A abend reason code A 4 byte hexadecimal code that uniquely identifies a problem with MOSeries for OS 390 A complete list of MOSeries for OS 390 abend reason codes and their explanations is contained in the ed manual active log See recovery log adapter An interface between MOSeries for OS 390 and TSO IMS CICS or batch address spaces An adapter is an attachment facility that enables applications to access MOSeries services address space The area of virtual
311. ost if the accounting trace is started or stopped while applications are running For information about the conditions that must be satisfied for successful collection of accounting data see the GLOBAL Service data from the entire subsystem the synonym is C STAT Statistical data the synonym is 5 active traces CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled For further descriptions of each type see COMMENT string Specifies a comment that is reproduced in the trace output record except in the resident trace tables and can be used to record why the command was issued string is any character string It must be enclosed in single quotation marks if it includes a blank comma or special character Destination block DEST Limits the action of the STOP TRACE to traces started for particular des
312. ough 99 An asterisk its own ppecifies all page set identifiers This is the default See Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 223 DISPLAY USAGE DISPLAY USAGE returns three sets of information in the following messages CSQI0181 The number of pages currently being used on the page set specified 5 10301 The number of extents at restart and the number of times the page set has been expanded dynamically since restart CSOIO24I The restart RBA relative byte address for the subsystem This value can be used to determine where to truncate logs if required See the MQSeries far 05 390 Messages aud Caded manual for more information about these messages Note This command is issued internally by MQSeries during shutdown so that the restart is recorded on the OS 390 console log 224 MOSC Command Reference MOVE QLOCAL MOVE QLOCAL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use MOVE QLOCAL to move all the messages from local queue to another Synonym MOVE OL MOVE QLOCAL CMDSCOPE r QSGDISP PRIVATE MOVE QLOCAL source gt 1 1 CMDSCOPE qmgr name L_QSGDISP SHARED r TYPE MOVE target gt lt L TYPE ADD Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions You must specify the nam
313. ported only on local and model queues Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 123 Define queues A Queue Depth Low event indicates that an application has retrieved a message from a queue and this has caused the number of messages on the queue to become less than or equal to the queue depth low threshold see the ODEPTHLO parameter Note The value of this parameter can change implicitly For more information on this and the effect that shared queues on OS 390 have on this event see the description of the Queue Depth Low eveni aucuns book ENABLED Queue Depth Low events are generated DISABLED Queue Depth Low events are not generated QDPMAXEV Controls whether Queue Full events are generated This parameter is supported only on local and model queues A Queue Full event indicates that a put to a queue has been rejected because the queue is full that is the queue depth has already reached its maximum value Note The value of this parameter can change implicitly For more information on this and the effect that shared queues on OS 390 have on this event see the description of the Queue Full event in theMQSeries Event Monitoring book ENABLED Queue Full events are generated DISABLED Queue Full events are not generated OSGDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only Specifies the disposition of the object within the group QSGDISP ALTER DEFINE COPY The object definition resides on the page set The
314. pplied to cluster queues If you do not enter a value to qualify this parameter it is treated as a requested parameter and cluster list information is returned about all the queues displayed This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Note If the disposition requested is SHARED CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if QSGDISP is set to GROUP or SHARED ae The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled command is executed the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group OSGDISP Specifies the disposition of the objects for which information is to be displayed Values are LIVE This is the default value and
315. pported On OS 390 CICS default DOS IMS MVS OS2 UNIX WINDOWS WINDOWSNT and DEF are supported On OS 400 OS400 default CICS and DEF are supported On OS 2 Warp O2 default DOS WINDOWS UNIX CICS and DEF are supported On Tandem NSK NSK is supported On UNIX systems UNIX default OS2 DOS WINDOWS CICS and DEF are supported On Windows NT WINDOWSNT default DOS WINDOWS OS2 UNIX CICS and DEF are supported CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if QSGDISP is set to GROUP 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which it was entered only if you are using a shared queue environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group DESCR string Plain text comment It provides descriptive information about the object when an operator iss
316. ps only on for OS 390 Parameter descriptions channel name The name of the channel definition to be deleted This is required The name must be that of an existing channel CHLTABLE Specifies the channel definition table that contains the channel to be deleted This is optional OMGRTBL The channel table is that associated with the target queue manager This table does not contain any channels of type CLNTCONN This is the default 136 MOSC Command Reference DELETE CHANNEL CLNTTBL The channel table for CLNTCONN channels On Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 2 Warp OS 400 Tandem NSK UNIX systems and Windows NT this is normally associated with a queue manager but can be a system wide queue manager independent channel table if you set up a number of environment variables For more information about setting up environment variables see the manual On OS 390 this is associated with the target queue manager but separate from the main channel table CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if QSGDISP is set to GROUP 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active wit
317. r than the default user ID with messages utility In MOSeries a supplied set of programs that provide the system operator or system administrator with facilities in addition to those provided by the MOSeries commands Some utilities invoke more than one function 302 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference Bibliography This section describes the documentation available for all current products MQSeries cross platform publications Most of these publications which are sometimes referred to as the MOSeries family books apply to all MOSeries Level 2 products The latest MOSeries Level 2 products e MOSeries for AIX V5 1 e MOSeries for AS 400 V5 1 e MOSeries for AT amp T GIS UNIX V2 2 e MOSeries for Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS V2 2 1 1 e MOSeries for Compaq Tru64 UNIX V5 1 e MOSeries for HP UX V5 1 e for OS 2 Warp V5 1 e MOSeries for OS 390 V5 2 e MOSeries for SINIX DC OSx V2 2 e MOSeries for Sun Solaris V5 1 e MOSeries for Sun Solaris Intel Platform Edition V5 1 e MOSeries for Tandem NonStop Kernel V2 2 0 1 e MOSeries for VSE ESA V2 1 e MOSeries for Windows V2 0 e MOSeries for Windows V2 1 e MOSeries for Windows NT V5 1 The MO amp Series cross platform publications are e MOQSeries Brochure G511 1908 A QU LI GC33 0805 MQSeries Intercommunication SC33 1872 MQSeries Queue Manager Clusters SC34 5349 MQ
318. ram Chapter 1 Using commands 3 Rules for using commands A line starting with an asterisk in the first position is ignored This can be used to insert comments into the file A blank line is also ignored If a line ends with a continuation character or 4 the command continues with the next line that is not a comment line or a blank line Rules for naming MQSeries objects MOGeries queue process namelist channel and storage class objects exist in separate object name spaces and so objects from each type can all have the same name However an object cannot have the same name as any other object in the same name space For example a local queue cannot have the same name as a model queue Names in are case sensitive however you should remember that lowercase characters that are not contained within quotation marks are folded to uppercase The character set that can be used for naming all MQSeries objects is as follows Uppercase A Z Lowercase a z however on systems using EBCDIC Katakana you cannot use lowercase characters and there are also restrictions on the use of lowercase letters for OS 390 console support Numerics 0 9 Period Forward slash Underscore Percent sign The percent sign is a special character to RACF If you are using as the external security manager for for OS 390 you should not use in object names If
319. rameters QSGDISP QMGR is not affected by this command GROUP 140 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP GROUP Any object residing on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command except a local copy of the object is not affected by this command If the command is successful the following command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the queue sharing group to cause them to delete local copies on page set 0 DELETE NAMELIST name QSGDISP COPY The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value DELETE PROCESS DELETE PROCESS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DELETE PROCESS to delete a process definition Synonym DELETE PRO DELETE PROCESS FCMDSCOPE _ _ 1 DELETE PROCESS process name gt 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 L CMDSCOPE QSGDISP QMGR 1 gt lt L QSGDISP COPY 2 QSGDISP GROUP
320. re such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the information IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this information at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you O Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 287 Notices Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling i the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs incl
321. rid You must specify one or more user IDs Each user ID specified is signed off and signed back on again the next time that a request is issued on behalf of that user that requires security checking CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSOINPI EG The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled P The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 251 SET LOG SET LOG Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use SET LOG to modify certain log system parameter values Synonym SET LOG SET L0G integer L DEALLCT minutes L DEALLCT 14
322. ring NORMAL r QSGDISP QMGR 5 gt gt I QSGDISP COPY 1 12 77 I QSGDISP GROUP 7 QSGDISP PRIVATE RCVDATA X string Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 13 ALTER CHANNEL 1 SCYDATA string scveXIT string 7 RCVEXIT s tring 7 7 SENDDATA string SENDEXIT s tring L_SEQWRAP SHORTRTY integer E L suonrTMR integer 6 9 TPNAME string TRPTYPE DECNET LU62 10 NETBIOS 10 SPX TCP 11 UDP gt lt Notes 1 This parameter must follow immediately after the channel name except on OS 390 2 Valid only on Tandem NSK when TRPTYPE is LU62 3 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 4 Valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT 5 Valid only on OS 390 6 X Valid only if TRPTYPE is LU62 7 You can specify more than one value on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT only 8 Not valid on OS 390 9 Valid only on Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS 10 Valid only on OS 2 Warp and Windows NT 11 Valid only on AIX 12 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 6 8 Lxwrro string J USERID string You can use queue sharing groups only on MQSeries for OS 390 14
323. roup environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Requested parameters Specify one or more parameters that define the data to be displayed The parameters can be specified in any order but do not specify the same parameter more than once Note If no parameters are specified and the ALL parameter is not specified or defaulted the queue manager name is returned You can request the following information for the queue manager ALTDATE The date on which the definition was last altered in the form yyyy mm dd This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT ALTTIME The time at which the definition was last altered in the form hh mm ss This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 189 DISPLAY QMGR AUTHOREV Whether authorization events are generated CCSID Coded character set identifier This applies to all character string fields defined by the application programming interface APT including the names of objects and the creation date and time of each queue It does not apply to application data carried as the text of messages CHAD Whether a
324. rrently open by an application with any open options If an application has this queue open or has a queue open that eventually resolves to this queue the command fails The command also fails if this queue is a transmission queue and any queue that is or resolves to a remote queue that references this transmission queue is open q name The name of the local queue to be cleared The name must be defined to the local queue manager CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if OSGDISP is set to SHARED 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value 54 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference CLEAR QLOCAL qmgr name QSGDISP The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Specifies whether or not the queue definition
325. s increases 3 If the number specified is less than the current specification tape units that are not being used are immediately deallocated to adjust to the new value Active or premounted tape units remain allocated 4 Atape unit is a candidate for deallocation because of a lowered value only if there is no activity for the unit DEALLCT Specifies the length of time that an allocated archive read tape unit is allowed to remain unused before it is deallocated This overrides the value for DEALLCT set by CSQ6LOGP in the archive system parameters This together with the MAXRTU parameter allows MOSeries to optimize archive log reading from tape devices The possible values are minutes Specifies the maximum time in minutes between zero and 1439 Zero means that a tape unit will be deallocated immediately NOLIMIT or 1440 Indicates that the tape unit will never be deallocated DEFAULT Resets the MAXRTU and DEALLCT parameters to the values specified in the archive system parameters set by CSQ6LOGP Usage notes Notes 1 You are recommended to specify the maximum possible values within system constraints for both options to achieve the optimum performance for reading archive tapes 2 When you are asked to mount an archive tape and you reply CANCEL the MAXRTU value is reset to the current number of tape units For example if the current value is 10 but you reply CANCEL to the request for the seventh tape
326. s reserved names 5 rules for names of 4 R RCVDATA parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 88 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 RCVEXIT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 89 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 RCVEXIT parameter continued DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 RCVSEQ parameter RESET TPIPE 244 RECOVER BSDS command 232 REFRESH CLUSTER command 233 REFRESH SECURITY command 234 remote queue alter parameters 45 define 113 delete local definition 145 display attributes 200 REMOTEEV parameter ALTER OMGR 37 DISPLAY 192 REPLACE option DEFINE CHANNEL 89 DEFINE NAMELIST 98 DEFINE PROCESS 103 DEFINE queues 126 DEFINE STGCLASS 134 reply to queue alias defining 113 REPOS parameter ALTER OMGR 37 DISPLAY 192 REPOSNL parameter ALTER OMGR 37 DISPLAY 192 reserved names objects 6 queues 5 RESET CHANNEL command 236 RESET CLUSTER command 239 RESET OSTATS command 241 RESET TPIPE command 243 RESOLVE CHANNEL command 245 RESOLVE INDOUBT command 248 RESUME QMGR command 250 RETINTVL parameter DEFINE queues 127 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 RMID parameter DISPLAY TRACE 222 START TRACE 268 STOP TRACE 283 RNAME parameter DEFINE OREMOTE 127 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 ROMNAME parameter DEFINE OREMOTE 127 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 rules for using commands 1 RVERIFY SECURITY command 251 S SAVED parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 162 SCOPE parameter DEFINE queues 128 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 SCYDATA parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 89 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLA
327. s 126 DEFINE STGCLASS 134 NOSHARE parameter DEFINE queues 128 NOTRIGGER parameter DEFINE queues 129 NPMSPEED parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 86 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 O objects reserved names 6 OPENTYPE parameter DISPLAY QSTATUS 195 operator commands 285 OPPROCS parameter DISPLAY QSTATUS 196 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 OS 390 trace alter events being traced 49 display list of active traces 220 start 265 stop 281 OUTPUT parameter DISPLAY QSTATUS 198 P page set define 105 132 display usage 223 PARM parameter START CHINIT 259 START QMGR 264 310 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference PASSWORD parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 87 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSQMGR 172 PDF Portable Document Format 304 PERFMEV parameter ALTER QMGR 37 DISPLAY QMGR 192 PING CHANNEL command 228 PING QMGR command 231 PLATFORM parameter DISPLAY QMGR 192 PORT parameter STOP LISTENER 278 Portable Document Format PDF 304 PostScript format 305 priority queue DEFINE queues 122 PRIVATE parameter MOVE QLOCAL 226 process definition alter 29 define 99 delete 141 display 184 PROCESS parameter DEFINE queues 122 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 processes rules for names of 6 PSBNAME parameter DISPLAY QSTATUS 198 PSID parameter DEFINE STGCLASS 134 DISPLAY STGCLASS 216 DISPLAY USAGE 223 PSTID parameter DISPLAY QSTATUS 198 publications MQSeries 303 PURGE parameter DELETE QLOCAL 146 PUT parameter DEFINE queues 122 DISPLAY QUEUE 210 PUTAU
328. s is required The name must not be the same as any existing channel defined on this queue manager unless REPLACE or ALTER is specified On OS 390 client connection channel names can LEN others contain only valid characters see AUTOSTART Specifies whether an LU 6 2 responder process for the channel will be started at queue manager startup ENABLED The responder is started DISABLED The responder is not started this is the default This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of RCVR RQSTR SVR and SVRCONN It is supported only on Tandem NSK BATCHINT integer The minimum amount of time in milliseconds that a channel will keep a batch open The batch is terminated by whichever of the following occurs first e BATCHSZ messages have been sent or e The transmission queue is empty and BATCHINT is exceeded The default value is zero which means that the batch is terminated as soon as the transmission queue becomes empty or the BATCHSZ limit is reached The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of SDR SVR CLUSSDR or CLUSRCVR It is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT BATCHSZ integer The maximum number of messages that can be sent through a channel before taking a checkpoint The maximum batch size actually used is th
329. s namelist open the command fails CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager if OSGDISP is set to GROUP 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 139 DELETE NAMELIST QSGDISP You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group This parameter applies to OS 390 only Specifies the disposition of the object to which you are applying the command that is where it is defined and how it behaves COPY The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP COPY Any object residing in the shared repository or any object defined using a command that had the pa
330. s of CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE are summarized in 246 MOSC Command Reference RESOLVE CHANNEL Table 8 CHLDISP and CMDSCOPE for RESOLVE CHANNEL CHLDISP CMDSCOPE or CMDSCOPE qmgr name CMDSCOPE local qmgr PRIVATE Resolve private channel on Resolve private channel on the local queue manager the named queue manager SHARED Resolve a shared channel Not permitted all active queue managers This might automatically generate a command using CMDSCOPE and send it to the appropriate queue manager If there is no definition for the channel on the queue manager to which the command is sent or if the definition is unsuitable for the command the command will fail The definition of a channel on the queue manager where the command is entered might be used to determine the target queue manager where the command is actually run Therefore it is important that channel definitions are consistent Inconsistent channel definitions might result in unexpected command behavior Usage notes This command is used when the other end of a link fails during the confirmation period and for some reason it is not possible to reestablish the connection In this situation the sending end remains in doubt as to whether or not the messages were received Any outstanding units of work need to be resolved by being backed out or committed Care must be exercised in the use of this command If the resolu
331. s optional if omitted the sequence number is not changed but the partner s receive sequence is set to the MQSeries send sequence number RCVSEQ integer The new recoverable sequence number to be set in the Tpipe for messages received by and to be set as the partner s send sequence number It must be hexadecimal and can be up to 8 digits long It is optional if omitted the sequence number is not changed but the partner s send sequence is set to the MQSeries receive sequence number XCFGNAME gname The name of the XCF group to which the Tpipe belongs This is 1 through 8 characters long It is optional if omitted the group name used is that specified in the OTMACON system parameter 244 MOSC Command Reference RESOLVE CHANNEL RESOLVE CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use RESOLVE CHANNEL to request channel to commit or back out in doubt messages Notes 1 On OS 390 a This is valid only for channels used for distributed queuing without CICS If you are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual b The command server and the channel initiator must be running 2 This command can be used only for sender SDR server SVR and cluster sender CLUSSDR channels including those that have been defined automatically 3 Where there is both a locally d
332. s to connect to MOSeries for OS 390 before for OS 390 has been started distributed application In message queuing a set of application programs that can each be connected to a different queue manager but that collectively constitute a single application Distributed Computing Environment DCE Middleware that provides some basic services making the development of distributed applications easier DCE is defined by the Open Software Foundation OSF distributed queue management DOM In message queuing the setup and control of message channels to queue managers on other systems DLO Dead letter queue DOM Distributed queue management dual logging A method of recording MOSeries for 5 390 activity where each change is recorded on two data sets so that if a restart is necessary and one data set is unreadable the other can be used Contrast with single logging dual mode See dual logging Glossary of terms and abbreviations 293 Glossary dump analysis and elimination DAE An OS 390 service that enables an installation to suppress SVC dumps and ABEND SYSUDUMP dumps that are not needed because they duplicate previously written dumps dynamic queue A local queue created when a program opens a model queue object See also permanent dynamic queue and temporary dynamic queue E environment See application environment ESM External security manager ESTAE Extended specify task abnormal ex
333. sage exits are not invoked for such channels The format and maximum length of the name depends on the environment On Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS and UNIX systems it is of the form libraryname functionname The maximum length of the string is 128 characters On OS 2 Warp Windows and Windows NT it is of the form dllname functionname where dllname is specified without the suffix DLL The maximum length of the string is 128 characters On OS 400 it is of the form progname libname where program name occupies the first 10 characters and libname the second 10 characters both blank padded to the right if necessary The maximum length of the string is 20 characters On OS 390 it is a load module name maximum length 8 characters 128 characters are allowed for exit names for client connection channels NETPRTY nteger The priority for the network connection Distributed queuing chooses the path with the highest priority if there are multiple paths available The value must be in the range 0 through 9 0 is the lowest priority This parameter is valid only for CLUSRCVR channels This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT NPMSPEED The class of service for nonpersistent messages on this channel FAST Fast delivery for nonpersistent messages messages might be lost if the channel is lost This is the default Messages are retrieved using MOGMO SYNCPOINT IF
334. scriptions DEFINE BUFFPOOL Parameter descriptions DEFINE CHANNEL Sender channel Server channel Receiver channel Requester channel Client connection channel Server connection channel Cluster sender channel Cluster receiver channel Parameter descriptions DEFINE MAXSMSGS Parameter descriptions DEFINE NAMELIST Parameter descriptions DEFINE PROCESS Parameter descriptions DEFINE PSID Parameter descriptions DEFINE queues DEFINE QALIAS DEFINE QLOCAL DEFINE OMODEL DEFINE QREMOTE Parameter descriptions Usage notes DEFINE STGCLASS Parameter descriptions Usage notes DELETE CHANNEL Parameter descriptions DELETE NAMELIST Parameter descriptions DELETE PROCESS Parameter descriptions DELETE queues DELETE QALIAS DELETE QLOCAL DELETE OMODEL DELETE OREMOTE Parameter descriptions DELETE STGCLASS Parameter descriptions DISPLAY CHANNEL Parameter descriptions DISPLAY CHSTATUS Parameter descriptions Usage notes DISPLAY CLUSOMGR Parameter descriptions DISPLAY CMDSERV Usage notes DISPLAY DOM 54 54 56 56 207 58 61 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 93 93 95 96 2 5799 100 105 105 106 106 108 110 A18 114 131 132 132 135 136 136 139 139 141 14 143 143 144 145 145 146 148 148 150 152 157 15
335. sharing group Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group 274 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference STOP SHARED Specifies whether the channel initiator should attempt to restart any active shared sending channels that it owns on another queue manager The possible values are RESTART Shared sending channels are to be restarted This is the default STOP Shared sending channels are not to be restarted Usage notes 1 When you issue the STOP CHINIT command stops any channels that are running in the following way Sender and server channels are stopped using STOP CHANNEL MODE QUIESCE All other channels are stopped using STOP CHAN
336. sists of the STATUS current data item and the short status field as noted in the syntax diagram This method of operation has the following consequences e An inactive channel might not have any saved status if it has never been current or has not yet reached a point where saved status is reset The common data fields might have different values for saved and current status Acurrent channel always has current status and might have saved status Channels can be current or inactive Current channels These are channels that have been started or on which a client has connected and that have not finished or disconnected normally They might not yet have reached the point of transferring messages or data or Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 159 DISPLAY CHSTATUS even of establishing contact with the partner Current channels have current status and might also have saved status The term Active is used to describe the set of current channels which are not stopped Inactive channels These are channels that either Have not been started On which a client has not connected Have finished Have disconnected normally Note that if a channel is stopped it is not yet considered to have finished normally and is therefore still current Inactive channels have either saved status or no status at all There can be more than one instance of the same named receiver requester cluster receiver or server connection c
337. storage available for a particular job address space identifier ASID A unique system assigned identifier for an address space administrator commands MQSeries commands used to manage MOSeries objects such as queues processes and namelists alert A message sent to a management services focal point in a network to identify a problem or an impending problem alert monitor In MQSeries for OS 390 a component of the CICS adapter that handles unscheduled events Occurring as a result of connection requests to MOsGeries for OS 390 alias queue object An object the name of which is an alias for a base queue defined to the local queue manager When an application or a queue manager uses an alias queue the alias name is resolved and the requested operation is performed on the associated base queue Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2000 allied address space See ally ally An OS 390 address space that is connected to for OS 390 alternate user security A security feature in which the authority of one user ID can be used by another user ID for example to open an MOSeries object APAR Authorized program analysis report application environment The software facilities that are accessible by an application program On the OS 390 platform CICS and IMS are examples of application environments application log In Windows NT a log that records significant application events applicat
338. t on the cluster Notes 1 On UNIX systems the command is valid only on AIX HP UX and Sun Solaris 2 On OS 390 the command fails if the channel initiator has not been started Synonym REF CLUSTER RERESH CLUSTER REFRESH CLUSTER clustername Notes 1 Valid only on OS 390 r CMDSCOPE 7 1 gt lt CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 2 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions clustername The name of the cluster to be refreshed This is required CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Ea qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 233 REFRESH SECURITY REFRESH SECURITY Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use REFRESH SECURITY to cause a sec
339. t CICS If ou are using CICS for distributed queuing see the amp 2 The command server must be running Synonym DIS DOM DISPLAY DQM CMDSCOPE gt lt gt gt DISPLAY DQM 1 CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled 7 command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 175 DISPLAY DQM Usage notes 1 The response to this command is a series of messages showing the current status of the channel initiator This includes the following Whether the channel initiator is running
340. t events are generated DISABLED Inhibit events are not generated This is the queue manager s initial default value LOCALEV Whether local error events are generated ENABLED Local error events are generated DISABLED Local error events are not generated This is the queue manager s initial default value MAXHANDSG integer The maximum number of open handles that any one task can have at the same time Do not specify a value less than zero or greater than 999 999 999 MAXMSGL nteger The maximum length of messages allowed on queues for this queue manager This is in the range 32 KB through 100 MB The default is 4 MB 4 194 403 bytes If you reduce the maximum message length for the queue manager you should also reduce the maximum message length of the SYSTEM DEFAULT LOCAL QUEUE definition and all other queues connected to the queue manager This ensures that the queue manager s limit is not less than that of any of the queues associated with it If you do not do this and applications inquire only the value of the queue s MAXMSGL they might not work correctly 36 MOSC Command Reference ALTER QMGR This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT MAXUMSGS integer The maximum number of uncommitted messages within a syncpoint This is a limit on the number of messages that can be retrieved plus the number of messages that can be put within any
341. t is dependent on OS 390 For example MOSeries for OS 390 is an OS 390 subsystem supervisor call SVC An OS 390 instruction that interrupts a running program and passes control to the supervisor so that it can perform the specific service indicated by the instruction SVC Supervisor call switch profile In MOSeries for OS 390 a RACF profile used when MOSeries starts up or when a refresh security command is issued Each switch profile that MOSeries detects turns off checking for the specified resource symptom string Diagnostic information displayed in a structured format designed for searching the IBM software support database synchronous messaging method of communication between programs in which programs place messages on message queues With synchronous messaging the sending program waits for reply to its message before resuming its own processing Contrast with asynchronous messaging syncpoint An intermediate or end point during processing of a transaction at which the transaction s protected resources are consistent At a syncpoint changes to the resources can safely be committed or they can be backed out to the previous syncpoint System Authorization Facility SAF An OS 390 facility through which MOSeries for OS 390 communicates with an external security manager such as RACF system command input queue A local queue on which application programs can put MOSeries commands The commands are retrie
342. t records significant system events such as supervisor calls and start I O operations for the purpose of problem determination get In message queuing to use the MOGET call to remove a message from a queue global trace An MQSeries for OS 390 trace option where the trace data comes from the entire for OS 390 subsystem globally defined object On OS 390 an object whose definition is stored in the shared repository The object is available to all queue managers in the queue sharing group See also locally defined object Generalized Trace Facility handle See connection handle and object handle hardened message A message that is written to auxiliary disk storage so that the message will not be lost in the event of a system failure See also persistent message ILE Integrated Language Environment immediate shutdown In MOSeries a shutdown of a queue manager that does not wait for applications to disconnect Current MOI calls are allowed to complete but new MOI calls fail after an immediate shutdown has been requested Contrast with quiesced shutdown and preemptive shutdown inbound channel A channel that receives messages from another queue manager See also shared inbound channel in doubt unit of recovery In the status of a unit of recovery for which a syncpoint has been requested but not yet confirmed Integrated Language Environment ILE The 5 400 Inte
343. taining a value for this parameter the queue manager takes no action based on its value Specify a value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 CFSTRUCT cfname Specifies the name of the Coupling Facility structure where you want messages stored when you use shared queues This parameter is supported only on OS 390 for local and model queues The name Cannot have more than 12 characters Must start with an uppercase letter A through Z Can include only the characters A through Z and 0 through 9 The name of the queue sharing group to which the queue manager is connected is prefixed to the name you supply The name of the queue sharing group is always four characters For example if you use a queue sharing group named NY03 and you supply the name PRODUCT the resultant Coupling Facility structure name is NYO3PRODUCT7 Note that the administrative structure for the queue sharing group in this case NYO3CSQ ADMIN cannot be used for storing messages For ALTER OLOCAL ALTER OMODEL DEFINE OLOCAL with REPLACE and DEFINE OMODEL with REPLACE the following rules apply e local queue with OSGDISP SHARED CFSTRUCT cannot change If you need to change either the CFSTRUCT or OSGDISP value you must delete and redefine the queue To preserve any of the messages on the queue you must offload the messages before you delete the queue and reload the messages after you have redefined the queue or mov
344. tains one or more messages The DEFTYPE HARDENBO INDXTYPE and USAGE parameters of the target queue must be the same as those of the source queue Usage notes 1 A typical use of the MOVE OLOCAL command is to move messages from a private queue to a shared queue when you are setting up a queue sharing group environment 2 The MOVE QLOCAL command moves messages it does not copy them 3 The MOVE OLOCAL command moves messages in a similar way to an application performing successive and MQPUT calls However the MOVE QLOCAL command does not physically delete logically expired messages and therefore no expiration reports will be generated 226 MOSC Command Reference MOVE QLOCAL 4 The priority context and persistence of each message are not changed e 10 The command performs no data conversion and calls no exits Confirm on delivery COD report messages are not generated but confirm on arrival COA report messages are This means that more than one COA report message can be generated for a message The MOVE QLOCAL command transfers the messages in batches At COMMIIT time if the trigger conditions are met trigger messages are produced This may or may not be at the end of the move operation Note Before the transfer of messages begins this command verifies that the number of messages on the source queue when added to the number of messages on the target queue will not cause MAXDEPTH on
345. tch For a saved channel instance this parameter has meaningful information only if the channel instance is in doubt However the parameter value is still returned when requested even if the channel instance is not in doubt It is updated with the LUWID of the next batch when this is known CURMSGS For a sending channel this is the number of messages that have been sent in the current batch It is incremented as each message is sent and when the channel becomes in doubt it is the number of messages that are in doubt For a saved channel instance this parameter has meaningful information only if the channel instance is in doubt However the parameter value is still returned when requested even if the channel instance is not in doubt For a receiving channel it is the number of messages that have been received in the current batch It is incremented as each message is received The value is reset to zero for both sending and receiving channels when the batch is committed CURSEQNO For a sending channel this is the message sequence number of the last message sent It is updated as each message is sent and when the channel becomes in doubt it is the message sequence number of the last message in the in doubt batch For a saved channel instance this parameter has meaningful information only if the channel instance is in doubt However the parameter value is still returned when requested even if the channel instance is not in
346. ter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 166 storage class alter 48 define 132 Inde 311 storage class continued delete 148 display 215 storage classes rules for names of 6 STRSTPEV parameter ALTER 38 DISPLAY 192 SupportPac 305 SUSPEND parameter DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 SUSPEND command 284 SWITCHES parameter DISPLAY SECURITY 214 SYNCPT parameter DISPLAY OMGR 192 T TARGO parameter DEFINE QALIAS 129 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 TASKNO parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 198 TDATA parameter START TRACE 269 terminology used in this book 291 thread display information about 218 resolving in doubt manually 248 TIME parameter ARCHIVE LOG 52 TIMEOUT parameter ALTER SECURITY 47 DISPLAY SECURITY 214 TNO parameter ALTER TRACE 50 DISPLAY TRACE 222 STOP TRACE 283 TPNAME parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 91 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 TRANSID parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 199 TRIGDATA parameter DEFINE queues 129 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 TRIGDPTH parameter DEFINE queues 129 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 TRIGGER parameter DEFINE queues 129 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 TRIGINT parameter ALTER 38 DISPLAY 192 TRIGMPRI parameter DEFINE queues 129 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 TRIGTYPE parameter DEFINE queues 130 DISPLAY QUEUE 211 TRPTYPE parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 91 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 173 TYPE attribute DISPLAY CHANNEL 152 TYPE parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 195 TYPE parameter continued DIS
347. ter queue manager If this definition is also advertised using a CLUSTER attribute care should be taken not to choose the local queue manager in the cluster workload exit because a cyclic definition will result Remote queues do not have to be defined locally The advantage of doing so is that applications can refer to the queue by a simple locally defined name rather than by one that is qualified by the ID of the queue manager on which the queue resides This means that applications do not need to be aware of the real location of the queue A remote queue definition can also be used as a mechanism for holding a queue manager alias definition or a reply to queue alias definition The name of the definition in these cases is The queue manager name being used as the alias for another queue manager name queue manager alias or The queue name being used as the alias for the reply to queue reply to queue alias Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 131 DEFINE STGCLASS DEFINE STGCLASS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DEFINE STGCLASS to define a storage class to page set mapping Synonym DEF STC DEFINE STGCLASS DEFINE STGCLASS storage class r CMDSCOPE 7 r DESCR 7 1 E stgetoss nane 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 CMDSCOPE
348. th each storage class generic class Name of the storage class This is required This is 1 through 8 characters The first character is in the range A through Z subsequent characters are A through Z or 0 through 9 Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 215 DISPLAY STGCLASS A trailing asterisk matches all storage classes with the specified stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk on its own specifies all storage classes CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group If OSGDISP is set to GROUP CMDSCOPE must be blank or the local queue manager 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name PSID integer The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group The page set identifier that a storage class maps to This is optional The string consists of two numeric c
349. that changes a queue manager name so that it is unique and valid for the system being used Externally the queue manager name remains unchanged New Technology File System NTFS A Windows NT recoverable file system that provides security for files nonpersistent message message that does not survive a restart of the queue manager Contrast with persistent message NSI Name service interface NTFS New Technology File System null character The character that is represented by X 00 OAM Object authority manager object In MOSeries an object is a queue manager a queue a process definition a channel a namelist or a storage class OS 390 only object authority manager OAM In MOSeries on UNIX systems for AS 400 and MOSeries for Windows NT the default authorization service for command and object management The OAM can be replaced by or run in combination with a customer supplied security service object descriptor A data structure that identifies a particular MOSeries object Included in the descriptor are the name of the object and the object type object handle The identifier or token by which a program accesses the MOSeries object with which it is working off loading In for OS 390 an automatic process whereby a queue manager s active log is transferred to its archive log Glossary OPM Original Program Model Original Program Model OPM The AS 400
350. the target queue to be exceeded If the MAXDEPTH of the target queue were to be exceeded no messages are moved The MOVE QLOCAL command can change the sequence in which messages can be retrieved The sequence remains unchanged only if You specify TYPE MOVE and The MSGDLVSQ parameter of the source and target queues is the same Messages are moved within one or more syncpoints The number of messages in each syncpoint is determined by the queue manager If anything prevents the moving of one or more messages the command stops processing This can mean that some messages have already been moved while others remain on the source queue Some of the reasons that prevent a message being moved are The target queue is full The message is too long for the target queue The message is persistent but the target queue cannot store persistent messages for example because the queue is shared The page set is full Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 227 PING CHANNEL PING CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use PING CHANNEL to test a channel by sending data as a special message to the remote queue manager and checking that the data is returned The data is generated by the local queue manager Notes 1 On OS 390 a This is valid only for channels used for distributed Tn without CICS If you
351. the queue sharing group ALL Display the TIMEOUT INTERVAL and SWITCHES parameters This is the default if no requested parameters are specified INTERVAL Time interval between checks SWITCHES Display the current setting of the switch profiles If the subsystem security switch is off no other switch profile settings are displayed TIMEOUT Timeout value on page 46 for details of the TIMEOUT and INTERVAL parameters 214 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY STGCLASS DISPLAY STGCLASS Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use DISPLAY STGCLASS to display information about storage classes Synonym DIS STC DISPLAY STGCLASS r CMDSCOPE 7 DISPLAY STGCLASS generic class gt 1 ALL CMDSCOPE qmgr name 1 CMDSCOPE r QSGDISP LIVE gt gt lt PSID integer QSGDISP ALL requested attrs QSGDISP QMGR I QSGDISP COPY 1 t QSGDISP GROUP QSGDISP PRIVATE Requested attrs Y ALTDATE LALTTIME DESCR XCFGNAME L XCFMNAME Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 Parameter descriptions You use DISPLAY STGCLASS to show the page set identifiers that are associated wi
352. the transmission protocol is TCP IP The listener stops in quiesce mode it disregards any further requests 278 MQSeries MQSC Command Reference STOP QMGR STOP QMGR Compaq DIGITAL OpenVMS OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT Use STOP to stop the queue manager Synonym There is no synonym for this command STOP QMGR STOP Notes r MODE QUIESCE CMDSCOPE gt lt MODE FORCE 1 MODE RESTART 5 1 CMDSCOPE 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions The parameters are optional CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name MODE The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The ef
353. tinations More than one value can be specified but do not use the same value twice If no value is specified the list is not limited Possible values and their meanings are GTF The Generalized Trace Facility RES A wrap around table residing in the ECSA SMF The System Management Facility SRV A serviceability routine designed for problem diagnosis 282 MQSC Command Reference STOP TRACE 5 for a list of allowed destinations for each trace type Constraint block CLASS nteger Limits the action of the STOP TRACE to traces started for particular classes See the START TRACE command for a list of allowed classes A range of classes can be specified as m n for example CLASS 01 03 You cannot specify a class if you did not specify a trace type The default is CLASS which does not limit the command RMID integer Limits the action of the STOP TRACE to traces started for particular resource managers See the START TRACE command for a list of allowed resource manager identifiers Do not use this option with the STAT or ACCTG trace type If the list of RMIDs includes 231 the tracing for this resource manager is left unchanged if one of the following is true TRACE GLOBAL or TRACE is not specified The list of destinations does not include RES This list of classes does not include 01 or 04 Also comments will be truncated to 120 characters The default is RMID which does not limit the
354. tion specified is not the same as the resolution at the receiving end messages can be lost or duplicated Chapter 2 The commands 247 RESOLVE INDOUBT RESOLVE INDOUBT Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use RESOLVE INDOUBT to resolve threads left in doubt because or a transaction manager could not resolve them automatically Note This command does not apply to units of recovery associated with batch or TSO applications unless you are using the RRS adapter Synonym RES IND RESOLVE INDOUBT RESOLVE INDOUBT connection name ACTION COMMIT gt BAckoUT CMDSCOPE 7 NID gt 1 QMNAME qmgr CMDSCOPE qmgr name Ynetwork id Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions connection name 1 through 8 character connection name For a CICS connection it is the CICS applid For an IMS adaptor connection it is the IMS control region job name e For an IMS bridge connection it is the subsystem name For an RRS connection it is RRSBATCH ACTION Specifies whether to commit or back out the in doubt threads COMMIT Commits the threads BACKOUT Backs out the threads CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a memb
355. to define a page set and associated buffer pool Note You can issue DEFINE PSID only from the CSQINP1 initialization data set If more than one DEFINE PSID command is issued for the same page set only the last one is actioned Synonym DEF PSID DEFINE PSID r BUFFPOOL 0 DEFINE PSID psid number gt lt BUFFPOOL integer Parameter descriptions psid number Identifier of the page set This is required In for OS 390 a one to one relationship exists between page sets and the VSAM data sets used to store the pages The identifier consists of a number in the range 00 through 99 It is used to generate a ddname which references the VSAM ESDS data set in the range 50 0000 through 5 0099 The identifier must not be the same as any other page set identifier currently defined on this queue manager BUFFPOOL integer The buffer pool number in the range 0 through 3 This is optional The default is 0 Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 105 DEFINE QUEUES DEFINE queues This section contains the following commands NE OALIA These queues are supported on the following platforms Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Dd Dd DEFINE QALIAS Use DEFINE QALIAS to define a new alias queue and set its parameters Note An alias queue provides a level of indirectio
356. trols the action of the MCA only if the message retry exit name is blank If the exit name is not blank the value of MRTMR is passed to the exit for the exit s use but the retry interval is controlled by the exit and not by this parameter The value must be greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 999 999 999 A value of zero means that the retry will be performed as soon as possible provided that the value of MRRTY is greater than zero This parameter is valid only for channels with a channel type CHLTYPE of RCVR ROSTR CLUSRCVR It is not supported on OS 390 MSGDATA string User data for the channel message exit maximum length 32 characters This data is passed to the channel message exit when it is called On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can specify data for more than one exit program by specifying multiple strings separated by commas The total length of the field must not exceed 999 characters On OS 400 you can specify up to 10 strings each of length 32 characters The first string of data is passed to the first message exit specified the second string to the second exit and so on On other platforms you can specify only one string of message exit data for each channel MSGEXIT string Channel message exit name On Tandem NSK there is only one channel user exit program If the MSGEXIT MREXIT SCYEXIT SENDEXIT and RCVEXIT parameters are all left blank the ch
357. types this option is not permitted CMDSCOPE qmgr name For a shared SDR ROSTR and SVR with a nonblank CONNAME start as a shared channel on the named queue manager For all other types this option is not permitted CMDSCOPE Not permitted Channels started with CHLDISP FIXSHARED are tied to the specific queue manager if the channel initiator on that queue manager stops for any reason will not be recovered Y another queue manager in the group See the MOSeries Intercommunication manual for full details about SHARED and FIXSHARED channels Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 257 START START Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use START CHINIT to start a channel initiator Note On OS 390 1 This is valid only for channels used for distributed queuing without CICS If are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual 2 The command server must be running Synonym STA CHI MQSeries for OS 390 START CHINIT PARM CSQXPARM START CHINIT L_ENVPARM jcl substitut ion PARM member name CMDSCOPE 7 1 CMDSCOPE qmgr name Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group MQSeries on other platforms START CHINIT START CHINIT gt lt
358. uding this one and ii the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged should contact IBM United Kingdom Laboratories Mail Point 151 Hursley Park Winchester Hampshire England SO21 2JN Such information may be available subject to appropriate terms and conditions including in some cases payment of a fee The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement IBM International Programming License Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products 288 MOSC Command Reference Notices Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States or other countries or both AIX AS 400 CICS DB2 IBM MOGSeries OS 2 05 390 05 400 Lotus Notes is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation in the United States or other countries or both Microsoft Windows Windows NT and the Windows logo are trademarks of Micr
359. ues the DISPLAY PROCESS command Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 101 DEFINE PROCESS It should contain only displayable characters The maximum length is 64 characters In a DBCS installation it can contain DBCS characters subject to a maximum length of 64 bytes Note If characters are used that are not in the coded character set identifier CCSID for this queue manager they might be translated incorrectly if the information is sent to another queue manager ENVRDATA string A character string that contains environment information pertaining to the application to be started The maximum length is 128 characters The meaning of ENVRDATA is determined by the trigger monitor application The trigger monitor provided by appends ENVRDATA to the parameter list passed to the started application The parameter list consists of the MOTMC2 structure followed by one blank followed by ENVRDATA with trailing blanks removed Notes 1 On OS 390 ENVRDATA is not used by the trigger monitor applications provided by MOSeries 2 On UNIX systems ENVRDATA can be set to the ampersand character to make the started application run in the background LIKE process name The name of an object of the same type whose parameters will be used to model this definition If this field is not filled in and you do not complete the parameter fields related to the command the values are taken from the default definition for t
360. ueue manager An MOSeries object that defines the attributes of a particular queue manager queue manager event An event that indicates An error condition has occurred in relation to the resources used by a queue manager For example a queue is unavailable A significant change has occurred in the queue manager For example a queue manager has stopped or started queue sharing group In MOSeries for OS 390 group of queue managers in the same sysplex that can access a single set of object definitions stored in the shared repository and a single set of shared queues stored in the coupling facility See also shared queue queuing See message queuing quiesced shutdown In a shutdown of a queue manager that allows all connected applications to disconnect Contrast with immediate shutdown and preemptive shutdown A type of shutdown of the CICS adapter where the adapter disconnects from MQSeries but only after all the currently active tasks have been completed Contrast with forced shutdown quiescing In MOSeries the state of a queue manager prior to it being stopped In this state programs are allowed to finish processing but no new programs are allowed to start R RBA Relative byte address reason code return code that describes the reason for the failure or partial success of an MOI call receiver channel In message queuing a channel that responds to a sender channel takes messages
361. ueue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled The command is executed on the local queue manager and is also passed to every active queue manager in the queue sharing group The effect of this is the same as entering the command on every queue manager in the queue sharing group Usage notes 1 If there is more than one queue with a name that satisfies the generic 4 all those queues are reset Issue this command from an application and not the OS 390 console or its equivalent to ensure that the statistical information is recorded Each queue manager in a queue sharing group maintains its copy of the following performance statistics independently MSGIN Incremented each time a message is put to the shared queue MSGOUT Incremented each time a message is removed from the shared queue HIODEPTH Calculated by comparing its current value for HIODEPTH with the new queue depth it obtains from the coupling facility during every put operation To obtain full statistics for a shared queue you should specify CMDSCOPE on RESET QSTATS to broadcast the command to all queue managers in the queue sharing group The peak queue depth will approximate to the maximum of all the returned HIODEPTH values and the total MOPUT and counts will approximate to the sum of all the returned MSGIN and MSG
362. ueue on OS 390 is always SYSTEM CHANNEL INITO On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT you can specify which initiation queue to use if you do not specify this SYSTEM CHANNEL INITO is used On other platforms it must be specified PARM member name The load module that contains the channel initiator initialization parameters member name is the name of a load module provided by the installation The default is CSOXPARM which is provided by This parameter is valid only on OS 390 Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 259 START CMDSERV START CMDSERV Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Dd Use START CMDSERYV to initialize the command server Synonym STA CS START CMDSERV START CMDSERV gt lt Usage notes 1 START CMDSERV starts the command server and allows it to process commands in the system command input queue SYSTEM COMMAND INPUT mover commands and commands using CMDSCOPE If this command is issued through the initialization files or through the operator console before work is released to the queue manager that is before the command server is started automatically it overrides any earlier STOP CMDSERV command and allows the queue manager to start the command server automatically by putting it into an ENABLED state If this command is issued through the operator console
363. ules for naming objects 4 rules for using 1 synonym 2 COMMENT parameter ALTER TRACE 50 DISPLAY TRACE 221 START TRACE 266 STOP TRACE 282 CONNAME parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 78 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CHSTATUS 162 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 DISPLAY OSTATUS 197 CONVERT parameter DEFINE CHANNEL 80 DISPLAY CHANNEL 155 DISPLAY CLUSOMGR 172 CPILEVEL parameter DISPLAY 190 CRDATE parameter DISPLAY QUEUE 209 308 MOSC Command Reference CRTIME parameter DISPLAY QUEUE 209 CURDEPTH parameter DISPLAY OSTATUS 196 DISPLAY QUEUE 209 CURLUWID parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 163 CURMSGS parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 163 CURRENT parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 162 CURSEONO parameter DISPLAY CHSTATUS 163 D DATALEN parameter PING CHANNEL 230 DEADO parameter ALTER OMGR 34 DISPLAY OMGR 190 DEALLCT parameter SET LOG 253 DEFAULT parameter SET LOG 253 DEFBIND parameter DEFINE queues 116 DISPLAY QUEUE 209 DEFINE BUFFPOOL command 56 DEFINE CHANNEL command 57 DEFINE MAXSMSGS command 93 DEFINE NAMELIST command 95 DEFINE PROCESS command 99 DEFINE PSID command 105 DEFINE QALIAS command 106 DEFINE OLOCAL command 108 DEFINE OMODEL command 110 DEFINE OREMOTE command 113 DEFINE STGCLASS command 132 DEFPRTY parameter DEFINE queues 117 DISPLAY QUEUE 209 DEFPSIST parameter DEFINE queues 117 DISPLAY QUEUE 209 DEFSOPT parameter DEFINE queues 117 DISPLAY QUEUE 209 DEFTYPE parameter DEFINE O
364. unit the value is reset to six Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 253 START CHANNEL START CHANNEL Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use START CHANNEL to start a channel Notes 1 On 05 390 a This is valid only for channels used for distributed ming without CICS If you are using CICS for distributed queuing see the manual b The command server and the channel initiator must be running 2 This command can be issued to a channel of any type except CLNTCONN channels including those that have been defined automatically If however it is issued to a receiver RCVR server connection SVRCONN or cluster receiver CLUSRCVR channel the only action is to enable the channel not to start it 3 Where there is both a locally defined channel and an auto defined cluster sender channel of the same name the command applies to the locally defined channel If there is no locally defined channel but more than one auto defined cluster sender channel the command applies to the channel that was last added to the local queue manager s repository Synonym STA CHL START CHANNEL CMDSCOPE ___ 1 START CHANNEL channel name gt 2 I CMDSCOPE qmgr name 2 L CMDSCOPE CHLDISP PRIVATE 1 gt lt 2 I CHLDISP
365. unt Short retry timer Transport type LU 6 2 transaction program name User identifier for initiating LU 6 2 session Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 173 DISPLAY CMDSERV DISPLAY CMDSERV Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DISPLAY CMDSERV to display the status of the command server Synonym DIS CS DISPLAY CMDSERV DISPLAY CMDSERV gt lt Usage notes 1 The command server takes messages from the system command input queue and commands using CMDSCOPE and processes them DISPLAY CMDSERV displays the status of the command server 2 The response to this command is a message showing the current status of the command server which is one of the following ENABLED Available to process commands DISABLED Not available to process commands STARTING START CMDSERV in progress STOPPING STOP CMDSERV in progress STOPPED STOP CMDSERV completed RUNNING Available to process commands currently processing a message WAITING Available to process commands currently waiting for a message 174 MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY DOM DISPLAY DOM Compaq OS 390 OS 400 OS 2 Warp Compaq NSK UNIX systems Windows NT DIGITAL OpenVMS Use DISPLAY DOM to display information about the channel initiator Notes 1 This is valid only for channels used for distributed peu withou
366. urity refresh to be carried out Synonym REF SEC REBUILD SECURITY is another synonym for REFRESH SECURITY REFRESH SECURITY r CMDSCOPE gt 4 REFRESH SECURITY gt lt MQADMIN 1 L MQNLISTA t CMDSCOPE qmgr name MQPROC 1 MQQUEUE CMDSCOPE Notes 1 Valid only when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Parameter descriptions This command causes to refresh in storage ESM external security manager for example profiles The in storage profiles for the resources being requested are deleted New entries are created when security checks for them are performed and are validated when the user next requests access See the MQSeries for OS 390 System Setup Guidd for more information about RACF commands you have to issue when you issue this command You must specify the resource class for which the security refresh is to be performed The classes are resource classes MOADMIN Administration type resources MONLIST Namelist resources MOPROC Process resources MQQUEUE Queue resources Note If when refreshing this class it is determined that a security switch relating to one of the other classes has been changed a refresh for that class also takes place 234 MOSC Command Reference REFRESH SECURITY CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queu
367. used by the intra group queuing agent IGQUSER On OS 390 only displays the user ID used by the intra group queuing agent INHIBTEV Whether inhibit events are generated LOCALEV Whether local error events are generated MAXHANDS The maximum number of open handles that any one task can have at any one time MAXMSGL The maximum message length that can be handled by the queue manager Individual queues or channels might have a smaller maximum than this MAXPRTY The maximum priority This is 9 MAXUMSGS Maximum number of uncommitted messages within one syncpoint This parameter is not supported on OS 390 use DISPLAY MAXSMSGS instead Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 191 DISPLAY QMGR PERFMEV Whether performance related events are generated PLATFORM The architecture of the platform on which the queue manager is running This is MVS OPENVMS NSK OS2 05400 UNIX or WINDOWSNT OMID The internally generated unique name of the queue manager This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT name of the local queue manager See OSGNAME The name of the queue sharing group to which the queue manager belongs or blank if the queue manager is not a member of a queue sharing group You can use queue sharing groups only on MOSeries for OS 390 REMOTEEV Whether remote error events are generated REPOS The name of a cluster for which this qu
368. uto definition of receiver and server connection channels is enabled This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CHADEV Whether auto definition events are enabled This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CHADEXIT The name of the channel auto definition exit This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLWLEXIT The name of the cluster workload exit This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLWLDATA The data passed to the cluster workload exit This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLWLLEN The maximum number of bytes of message data that is passed to the cluster workload exit This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CMDLEVEL Command level This indicates the function level of the queue manager COMMANDO The name of the system command input queue Suitably authorized applications can put commands on this queue CPILEVEL Reserved this value has no significance DEADQ The name of the queue to which messages are sent if they cannot be routed to their correct destination the dead letter queue or undelivered message queue The default is blanks For example messages are put on this queue w
369. vated For further descriptions of each trace type see START TRACE an page 263 Specify one of the following GLOBAL Service data from the entire MQSeries subsystem the synonym is C STAT Statistical data the synonym is 5 ACCTG Accounting data the synonym is A Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 49 ALTER TRACE And TNO integer The number of the trace to be altered This limits the list to a particular trace identified by its trace number 1 through 32 You can specify only one trace number CMDSCOPE This parameter specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group CMDSCOPE cannot be used for commands issued from the first initialization input data set CSQINP1 oy The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled Trace parameters CLASS nteger The trace class to be altered This limits the list to IFCIDs activated for particular classes See START TRACE on page 2651 for list of allowed classes A range of classes can be specified as m n for example CLASS 01 03 CLASS activates
370. ved from the queue by the command server which validates them and passes them to the command processor to be run system control commands Commands used to manipulate platform specific entities such as buffer pools storage classes and page sets system diagnostic work area SDWA Data recorded in a SYSI LOGREC entry which describes a program or hardware error system initialization table SIT A table containing parameters used by CICS on start up SYS1 LOGREC service aid containing information about program and hardware errors T TACL Tandem Advanced Command Language target library high level qualifier thlqual High level qualifier for OS 390 target data set names task control block TCB An OS 390 control block used to communicate information about tasks within an address space that are connected to an OS 390 subsystem such as MOSeries for OS 390 or CICS task switching The overlapping of I O operations and processing between several tasks In MQSeries for OS 390 the task switcher optimizes performance by allowing some MQI calls to be executed under subtasks rather than under the main CICS TCB TCB Task control block temporary dynamic queue A dynamic queue that is deleted when it is closed Temporary dynamic queues are not recovered if the queue manager fails so they can contain nonpersistent messages only Contrast with permanent dynamic queue teraspace In for AS 400 form o
371. w the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group Ea The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value Chapter 2 The MOSeries commands 243 RESET TPIPE qmgr name The command is executed on the queue manager you specify providing the queue manager is active within the queue sharing group You can specify a queue manager name other than the queue manager on which the command was entered only if you are using a queue sharing group environment and if the command server is enabled XCFMNAME mname The name of the XCF member within the group specified by XCFGNAME to which the Tpipe belongs This is 1 through 16 characters long and is required ACTION Specifies whether to commit or back out any unit of recovery associated with this Tpipe This is required if there is such a unit of recovery reported in message CSQ2020E otherwise it is ignored COMMIT The messages from are confirmed as having already transferred to IMS that is they are deleted from the MQSeries IMS bridge queue BACKOUT The messages from are backed out that is they are returned to the MOSeries IMS bridge queue SENDSEQ integer The new recoverable sequence number to be set in the Tpipe for messages sent by and to be set as the partner s receive sequence number It must be hexadecimal and can be up to 8 digits long It i
372. with an operator panel interface to allow the setup and control of channels channel definition file CDF In MQSeries a file containing communication channel definitions that associate transmission queues with communication links 292 MQSC Command Reference channel event An event indicating that a channel instance has become available or unavailable Channel events are generated on the queue managers at both ends of the channel checkpoint A time when significant information is written on the log Contrast with syncpoint In on UNIX systems the point in time when data record described in the log is the same as the data record in the queue Checkpoints are generated automatically and are used during the system restart process CI Control interval circular logging In MQSeries on UNIX systems for OS 2 Warp and MQSeries for Windows NT the process of keeping all restart data in a ring of log files Logging fills the first file in the ring and then moves on to the next until all the files are full At this point logging goes back to the first file in the ring and starts again if the space has been freed or is no longer needed Circular logging is used during restart recovery using the log to roll back transactions that were in progress when the system stopped Contrast with linear logging CL Control Language client A run time component that provides access to qu
373. with the specified stem followed by zero or more characters An asterisk on its own specifies all channel definitions The channels must all be defined to the local queue manager XMITO q name The name of the transmission queue for which status information is to be displayed for the specified channel or channels This parameter can be used to limit the number of sets of status information that is displayed If it is not specified the display is not limited in this way 160 MQSeries MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY CHSTATUS CHLDISP This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies the disposition of the channels for which information is to be displayed as used in the START and STOP CHANNEL commands and not that set by OSGDISP for the channel definition Values are ALL This is the default value and displays requested status information for private channels If there is a shared queue manager environment and the command is being executed on the queue manager where it was issued or if CURRENT is specified this option also displays the requested status information for shared channels PRIVATE Display requested status information for private channels SHARED Display requested status information for shared channels This is allowed only if there is a shared queue manager environment and either CMDSCOPE is blank or the local queue manager CURRENT is specified CHLDISP displays the following values PRIVATE Th
374. y object residing on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command or any object defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP SHARED is not affected by this command If the deletion is successful the following command is generated and sent to all active queue managers in the queue sharing group to cause them to make or delete local copies on page set zero DELETE queue name QSGDISP COPY or for a local queue only DELETE QLOCAL name NOPURGE QSGDISP COPY Note You always get the NOPURGE option even if you specify PURGE To delete messages on local copies of the queues you must explicitly issue the command DELETE QLOCAL name QSGDISP COPY PURGE for each copy OMGR The object definition resides on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP QMGR Any object residing in the shared repository or any local copy of such an object is not affected by this command This is the default value SHARED This option applies only to local queues The object definition resides in the shared repository The object was defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP SHARED Any object residing on the page set of the queue manager that executes the command or any object defined using a command that had the parameters QSGDISP GROUP is not affected by this command Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 147 DELE
375. y of the queue types allowed for a DEFINE command QLOCAL QALIAS QREMOTE or their synonyms A queue type of QCLUSTER can be specified to display only cluster queue information on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT On AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT OTYPE type can be used as a synonym for this parameter If no parameters are specified and the ALL parameter is not specified or defaulted the queue name and queue type are displayed Requested parameters Specify one or more parameters that define the data to be displayed The parameters can be specified in any order but do not specify the same parameter more than once Most parameters are relevant only for queues of a particular type or types Parameters that are not relevant for a particular type of queue cause no output nor is an error raised rahle 5 shows the parameters that are relevant for each type of queue There is a brief description of each parameter after the table but for more information see the DEFINE command for each queue type Table 5 Parameters that can be returned by the DISPLAY QUEUE command Local queue Model queue Alias queue Remote Cluster queue queue ALTDATE a Ww a nw in a a 206 MOSC Command Reference DISPLAY QUEUE Table 5 Parameters that can be returned
376. you do these names are not included in any security checks when generic profiles are used Notes 1 Leading or embedded blanks are not allowed 2 You should avoid using names with leading or trailing underscores because they cannot be handled by the for OS 390 operations and control panels Any name that is less than the full field length can be padded to the right with blanks All short names that are returned by the queue manager are always padded to the right with blanks Any structure to the names for example the use of the period or underscore is not significant to the queue manager When using CL commands or menus on AS 400 systems lowercase a z forward slash and percent are special characters If you use any of these characters in a name the name must be enclosed in quotation marks Lowercase a z characters are changed to uppercase if the name is not enclosed in quotation marks Queue names Queues can have names up to 48 characters long 4 MQSC Command Reference Reserved queue names Rules for naming objects Names that start with SYSTEM are reserved for queues defined by the queue manager You can use the ALTER or DEFINE REPLACE commands to change these queue definitions to suit your installation The following names are defined for MOSeries SYSTEM ADMIN CHANNEL EVENT Queue for channel events SYSTEM ADMIN COMMAND QUEUE Queue to whic
377. ystems it is of the form libraryname functionname The maximum length is 128 characters On OS 2 Warp and Windows NT it is of the form 11 functionname where dllname is specified without the suffix DLL The maximum length is 128 characters On OS 390 it is a load module name maximum length 8 characters On OS 400 it is of the form progname libname where program name occupies the first 10 characters and libname the second 10 characters both blank padded to the right if necessary The maximum length of the string is 20 characters Chapter 2 The MQSeries commands 33 ALTER QMGR This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX 05 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CLWLLEN length The maximum number of bytes of message data that is passed to the cluster workload exit Specify a value e Between zero and 100 MB on MOSeries for OS 390 systems Between zero and 999 999 999 on other platforms The initial default value is 100 This parameter is valid only on AIX HP UX OS 2 Warp OS 390 OS 400 Sun Solaris and Windows NT CMDSCOPE This parameter applies to OS 390 only and specifies how the command is executed when the queue manager is a member of a queue sharing group 4r The command is executed on the queue manager on which it was entered This is the default value qmgr name DEADO string The local name of a dead letter queue or undelivered message queue on which messag

& 'COSTA SC33-1369-13 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&amp; 'COSTA SC33-1369-13 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

& 'COSTA SC33-1369-13 Owner's Manual